Download 2013 Hyundai Accent Owner’s Manual PDF

Download 2013 Hyundai Accent Owner’s Manual PDF
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that
our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions
and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,
you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific
vehicle.
Please note that some models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD).
The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are
opposite of those written in this manual.
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the Department of Transportation and other government agencies in your country.
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
F2
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other
persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the
caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
✽ NOTICE
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
F3
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive
Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very
proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet
Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page
8-5 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2013 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval
system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
F4
table of contents
qq
Introduction
1
Your vehicle at a glance
2
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Features of your vehicle
4
Driving your vehicle
5
What to do in an emergency
6
Maintenance
7
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Index
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / 1-2
Fuel requirements / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-6
1
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist you
in many ways. We strongly recommend
that you read the entire manual. In order
to minimize the chance of death or injury,
you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words in this
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
vehicle. By reading your manual, you
learn about features, important safety
information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. A good
place to start is the index; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your
manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sections
plus an index. Each section begins with a
brief list of contents so you can tell at a
glance if that section has the information
you want.
1 2
You will find various WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to
enhance your personal safety.You should
carefully read and follow ALL procedures
and recommendations provided in these
WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTICEs.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which harm, serious bodily injury or
death could result if the warning is
ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which damage to your vehicle could
result if the caution is ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
Gasoline engine
Unleaded
For Europe
For the optimal vehicle performance, we
recommend you to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON
(Research Octane Number) 95/AKI (Anti
Knock Index) 91 or higher.
You may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating of RON 91~94/AKI 87~90
but it may result in slight performance
reduction of the vehicle.
Except Europe
Your new vehicle is designed to use only
unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating
of RON (Research Octane Number) 91/
AKI (Anti-Knock Index) 87 or higher.
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain
maximum performance with UNLEADED
FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling.
Introduction
CAUTION
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control system’s oxygen sensor and affect
emission control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.)
WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Leaded (if equipped)
For some countries, your vehicle is
designed to use leaded gasoline. When
you are going to use leaded gasoline,
ask to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle
is available or not.
Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is
same with unleaded one.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol),
and gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol (also known as wood alcohol)
are being marketed along with or instead
of leaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or
gasohol containing any methanol. Either
of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if
drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or drivability problems
may not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty if they result from the use
of:
1. Gasohol containing more than 10%
ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which contains
methanol. Discontinue use of any
gasohol product which impairs drivability.
1 3
Introduction
Use of MTBE
HYUNDAI recommends avoiding fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) in your vehicle.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may
reduce vehicle performance and produce
vapor lock or hard starting.
CAUTION
Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of
fuels containing methanol or fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your vehicle.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of
the fuel system.
Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasoline that meets Europe
Fuel standards (EN228) or equivalents.
For customers who do not use good
quality gasoline including fuel additives
regularly, and have problems starting or
the engine does not run smoothly, one
bottle of additives added to the fuel tank
at every 15,000km (for Europe)/5,000km
(except Europe). Additives are available
from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer
along with information on how to use
them. Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle in
another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
1 4
Diesel engine
Diesel fuel
Diesel engine must be operated only on
commercially available diesel fuel that
complies with EN 590 or comparable
standard. (EN stands for "European
Norm"). Do not use marine diesel fuel,
heating oils, or non-approved fuel additives, as this will increase wear and
cause damage to the engine and fuel
system. The use of non-approved fuels
and / or fuel additives will result in a limitation of your warranty rights.
Diesel fuel of above cetane 51 is used in
your vehicle. If two types of diesel fuel
are available, use summer or winter fuel
properly according to the following temperature conditions.
• Above -5°C (23°F) ... Summer type
diesel fuel.
• Below -5°C (23°F) ... Winter type diesel
fuel.
Watch the fuel level in the tank very carefully : If the engine stops through fuel failure, the circuits must be completely
purged to permit restarting.
Introduction
CAUTION
Do not let any gasoline or water
enter the tank. This would make it
necessary to drain it out and to
bleed the lines to avoid jamming the
injection pump and damaging the
engine.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
Biodiesel
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7% made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME), vegetable oil methyl ester
(VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding
7% with biodiesel will cause increased
wear or damage to the engine and fuel
system. Repair or replacement of worn or
damaged components due to the use of
non approved fuels will not be covered by
the manufactures warranty.
Biodiesel (for New Zealand)
Commercially supplied Diesel blends of
no more than 7% biodiesel, commonly
known as "B7 Diesel" may be used in
your vehicle if Biodiesel meets EN 14214
or equivalent specifications. (EN stands
for "European Norm"). The use of biofuels exceeding 7%, made from rapeseed
methyl ester (RME), vegetable oil methyl
ester (VME) etc. or mixing diesel exceeding 7% with biodiesel will cause
increased wear or damage to the engine
and fuel system. Repair or replacement
of worn or damaged components due to
the use of non approved fuels will not be
covered by the manufactures warranty.
CAUTION
CAUTION
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
• Never use any fuel, whether
diesel, B7 biodiesel or otherwise,
that fails to meet the latest petroleum industry specification.
• Never use any fuel additives or
treatments that are not recommended or approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
No special break-in period is needed. By
following a few simple precautions for the
first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to
the performance, economy and life of
your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute)
between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for long
periods of time, either fast or slow.
Varying engine speed is needed to
properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000
km (1,200 miles) of operation.
1 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-4
Engine compartment / 2-6
2
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................4-14
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ..................................................4-41
3. Central door lock switch* ......................4-14
4. Power window lock button*....................4-26
5. Power window switches* ......................4-23
6. Instrument panel illumination control
switch* ..................................................4-45
7. ESP OFF button* ..................................5-28
8. Headlight leveling device* ....................4-80
9. Fuel filler lid release lever ....................4-30
10. Trunk lid release lever (4 Door) ..........4-17
11. Fuse box..............................................7-66
12. Hood release lever ..............................4-28
13. Brake pedal ........................................5-23
14. Accelerator pedal ........................5-6, 5-11
15. Steering wheel manual tilt
control* ................................................4-37
* : if equipped
* The actual vehicle may differ from the illustration.
ORB010001L
2 2
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................4-14
2. Outside rearview mirror control
switch* ..................................................4-41
3. Central door lock switch* ......................4-14
4. Power window lock button*....................4-26
5. Power window switches* ......................4-23
6. Instrument panel illumination control
switch* ..................................................4-45
7. ESP OFF button* ..................................5-28
8. Headlight leveling device* ....................4-80
9. Fuel filler lid release lever ....................4-30
10. Trunk lid release lever (4 Door) ..........4-17
11. Fuse box..............................................7-66
12. Hood release lever ..............................4-28
13. Brake pedal ........................................5-23
14. Accelerator pedal ........................5-6, 5-11
15. Steering wheel manual tilt
control* ................................................4-37
* : if equipped
* The actual vehicle may differ from the illustration.
ORB012001R
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Left-Hand drive type
1. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-40
2. Light control/Turn signals .................4-75
3. Instrument cluster.............................4-43
4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-81
5. Ignition switch* ...................................5-5
6. Engine start/stop button*....................5-8
7. Digital clock and audio* .........4-112, 4-116
8. Steering wheel .................................4-37
9. Steering wheel audio control* ........4-117
10. Climate control system* ........4-88, 4-97
11. Hazard warning flasher
switch ......................................4-73, 6-2
12. Shift lever ..............................5-14, 5-17
13. Cigarette lighter* ..........................4-109
14. Parking brake lever ........................5-24
15. Passenger’s front air bag* ..............3-40
16. Glove box .....................................4-108
17. Power outlet* ................................4-111
* : if equipped
ORB010002L
2 4
Your vehicle at a glance
Right-Hand drive type
1. Driver’s front air bag* .......................3-40
2. Light control/Turn signals .................4-75
3. Instrument cluster.............................4-43
4. Wiper/Washer...................................4-81
5. Ignition switch* ...................................5-5
6. Engine start/stop button*....................5-8
7. Digital clock and audio* .........4-112, 4-116
8. Steering wheel .................................4-37
9. Steering wheel audio control* ........4-117
10. Climate control system* ........4-88, 4-97
11. Hazard warning flasher
switch ......................................4-73, 6-2
12. Shift lever ..............................5-14, 5-17
13. Cigarette lighter* ..........................4-109
14. Parking brake lever ........................5-24
15. Passenger’s front air bag* ..............3-40
16. Glove box .....................................4-108
17. Power outlet* ................................4-111
* : if equipped
ORB012002R
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (Kappa 1.4L)
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-36
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-42
3. Radiator cap .....................................7-38
4. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-34
5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-34
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ..............7-39
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-44
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-66
■ Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.4L/1.6L)
9. Positive battery terminal...................7-52
10. Negative battery terminal ..............7-52
11. Automatic transaxle fluid
dipstick* .........................................7-40
* : if equipped
ORB073070/ORB070001G
2 6
Your vehicle at a glance
■ Diesel Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-36
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-42
3. Radiator cap .....................................7-38
4. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-34
5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-34
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ..............7-39
7. Air cleaner.........................................7-44
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-66
9. Positive battery terminal...................7-52
10. Negative battery terminal ..............7-52
11. Automatic transaxle fluid
dipstick* .........................................7-40
12. Fuel filter........................................7-43
* : if equipped
ORB070001
2 7
Seats / 3-2
Seat belts / 3-11
Child restraint system / 3-24
Air bag - supplemental restraint system / 3-34
Safety features of your vehicle
3
Safety features of your vehicle
SEATS
Driver’s seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height
(4) Headrest
(5) Armrest*
Front passenger’s seat
(6) Forward and backward
(7) Seatback angle
(8) Headrest
Rear seat
(9) Headrest*
(10) Seatback folding*
*: if equipped
ORB030001N
3 2
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Loose objects
Loose objects in the driver’s foot
area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident. Do not place
anything under the front seats.
WARNING - Uprighting
seat
When you return the seatback to its
upright position, hold the seatback
and return it slowly and be sure
there are no other occupants
around the seat. If the seatback is
returned without being held and
controlled, the back of the seat
could spring forward resulting in
accidental injury to a person struck
by the seatback.
WARNING - Driver responsibility for passengers
Riding in a vehicle with the seatback reclined could lead to serious
or fatal injury in an accident. If a
seat is reclined during an accident,
the occupant’s hips may slide
under the lap portion of the seat
belt applying great force to the
unprotected abdomen. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result.
The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an
upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Do not use a sitting cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and passenger. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or
fatal internal injuries could result
because the seat belt can't operate
normally.
WARNING - Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the seat
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control,
and an accident causing death,
serious injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow anything to interfere
with the normal position of the
seatback. Storing items against a
seatback or in any other way
interfering with proper locking of
a seatback could result in serious
or fatal injury in a sudden stop or
collision.
• Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low
across the hips. This is the best
position to protect you in case of
an accident.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
and perhaps severe air bag
injuries, always sit as far back as
possible from the steering wheel
while maintaining comfortable
control of the vehicle. We recommend that your chest be at least
250 mm (10 inches) away from
the steering wheel.
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
After adjusting the seat, always
check that it is securely locked into
place by attempting to move the
seat forward or reverse without
using the lock release lever.
Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you
to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.
ORB030002
WARNING
• Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat
cushion forward may cause
strong pressure on the abdomen.
• Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
• Do not put a cigarette lighter on
the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may gush out of
the lighter and cause fire.
3 4
Front seat
Manual adjustment
Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever
that is under the front edge of the seat
cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and make
sure the seat is locked securely by trying
to move forward and backward without
using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.
ORB030003
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on the
seatback recline lever located on the
outside of the seat at the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat and
adjust the seatback of the seat to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the
seatback is locked in place. (The lever
MUST return to its original position for
the seatback to lock.)
Safety features of your vehicle
ORB030004
ORB030006
OMG038400
Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion,
push the lever that is located on the outside of the seat cushion upwards or
downwards.
• To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times.
• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever
up several times.
Armrest (for driver’s seat)
(if equipped)
To use the armrest, swing down the armrest to the lowest position.
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for the driver and front passenger, but
also helps to protect the head and neck
in the event of a collision.
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed as severe
injury to the occupants may
occur in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
• Do not adjust the headrest position of the driver's seat while the
vehicle is in motion.
3 6
ORBC030006
ORBC030007
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
*
ORB030017
Seatback pocket (if equipped)
The seatback pocket is provided on the
back of the front passenger’s seatback.
WARNING - Seatback
pockets
Do not put heavy or sharp objects
in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from
the pocket and injure vehicle occupants.
* if equipped
ONF039401
Rear seat
Headrest
The rear seat is equipped with headrests
for the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort
for passengers, but also helps to protect
the head and neck in the event of a collision.
• For maximum effectiveness in
case of an accident, the headrest
should be adjusted so the middle
of the headrest is at the same
height of the center of gravity of
an occupant's head. Generally,
the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the
height of the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close
to your head as possible. For this
reason, the use of a cushion that
holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
• Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed. Severe
injury to an occupant may occur
in the event of an accident.
Headrests may provide protection against severe neck injuries
when properly adjusted.
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Folding the rear seat (if equipped)
The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING
ORB030007
ORB030008
Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal (if equipped)
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button
(1) while pulling upward (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it
to the appropriate height.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.
3 8
The purpose of the fold-down rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry
longer objects than could not otherwise be accommodated.
Never allow passengers to sit on
top of the folded down seatback
while the car is moving as this is
not a proper seating position and
no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury
or death in case of an accident or
sudden stop. Objects carried on the
folded down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of the
front seats. This could allow cargo
to slide forward and cause injury or
damage during sudden stops.
Safety features of your vehicle
■ Type A
ORB030022
ORB030021
To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Make sure the rear seat belt webbing
is in the guide to prevent the seat belt
from being damaged.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright
position and if necessary, slide the
front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest
position.
■ Type B
ORBR030031
ORBC032022
4. Pull on the seatback folding lever, then
fold the seat toward the front of the
vehicle.
5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the
seatback backward. Push the seatback firmly until it clicks into place.
Make sure the seatback is locked in
place. When you return the seatback
to its upright position, always be sure it
has locked into position by pushing on
the top of the seatback.
6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper
position.
✽ NOTICE
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, after returning
the seatback to the upright position,
press the seatbelt and seatback at the
same time. Then pull the belt out. You
will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after being
folded down:
Be careful not to damage the seat
belt webbing or buckle. Do not
allow the seat belt webbing or
buckle to get caught or pinched in
the rear seat. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its
upright position by pushing on the
top of the seatback. Otherwise, in
an accident or sudden stop, the
seat could fold down and allow
cargo to enter the passenger compartment, which could result in
serious injury or death.
3 10
CAUTION - Damaging rear
seat belt buckles
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cushion, insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and
cushion. Doing so can prevent the
buckle from being damaged by the
rear seatback or luggage.
CAUTION - Rear seat belts
When returning the rear seatbacks
to the upright position, remember
to return the rear shoulder belts to
their proper position. Routing the
seat belt webbing through the rear
seat belt guides will help keep the
belts from being trapped behind or
under the seats.
WARNING - Cargo
Cargo should always be secured to
prevent it from being thrown about
the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants.
Special care of objects should be
taken when placing them in the rear
seats, since those may hit the front
seat occupants in a frontal collision.
WARNING - Cargo loading
Make sure the engine is off, the
automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or
the manual transaxle is in 1st, and
the parking brake is applied whenever loading or unloading cargo.
Failure to take these steps may
allow the vehicle to move if shift
lever is inadvertently moved to
another position.
Safety features of your vehicle
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system
WARNING
• For maximum restraint system
protection, the seat belts must
always be used whenever the car
is moving.
• Seat belts are most effective
when seatbacks are in the
upright position.
• Children age 12 and younger
must
always
be
properly
restrained in the rear seat. Never
allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. If a child over 12
must be seated in the front seat,
he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as
far back as possible.
• Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash. The shoulder
belt should be positioned midway
over your shoulder across your
collarbone.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.
A twisted belt can't do its job as
well. In a collision, it could even
cut into you. Be sure the belt
webbing is straight and not twisted.
• Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. If the belt
webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it.
WARNING
Seat belts are designed to bear
upon the bony structure of the
body, and should be worn low
across the front of the pelvis or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as
applicable; wearing the lap section
of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection
for which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils and chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild
soap and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
It is essential to replace the entire
assembly after it has been worn in
a severe impact even if damage to
the assembly is not obvious. Belts
should not be worn with straps
twisted. Each belt assembly must
only be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a
child being carried on the occupant's lap.
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the seat
belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent
the seat belt assembly from being
adjusted to remove slack.
• When you fasten the seat belt, be
careful not to latch the seat belt in
buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
• Do not unfasten the seat belt and
do not fasten and unfasten the
seat belt repeatedly while driving.
This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
• When fastening the seat belt,
make sure that the seat belt does
not pass over objects that are
hard or can break easily.
• Make sure there is nothing in the
buckle. The seat belt may not be
fastened securely.
3 12
1GQA2083
Seat belt warning (if equipped)
■ Type A
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink for approximately
6 seconds each time you turn the ignition
switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is unfastened after
the ignition switch is ON, the seat belt
warning light blinks again for approximately 6 seconds.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is unfastened after the ignition switch
is ON, the seat belt warning chime will
sound for approximately 6 seconds. At
this time, if the seat belt is fastened, the
chime will stop at once. (if equipped)
■ Type B
As a reminder to the driver, the driver’s
seat belt warning lights will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned ON or
if it is disconnected after the ignition
switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 9 km/h, the illuminated warning light will start to blink until you
drive under 6 km/h.
If you continue not to fasten the seat belt
and you drive over 20 km/h (12 mph) the
seat belt warning chime will sound for
approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.
Safety features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Front seat
If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
B180A01NF-1
ORB030020
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into
the buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
extend and let you move around. If there
is a sudden stop or impact, however, the
belt will lock into position. It will also lock
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
Height adjustment (front seat)
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 3 positions for maximum comfort and safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too near your neck. The
shoulder portion should be adjusted so
that it lies across your chest and midway
over your shoulder nearest the door and
not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster
into an appropriate position.
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).
To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has locked
into position.
WARNING
• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appropriate height. Never position the
shoulder belt across your neck or
face. Improperly positioned seat
belts can cause serious injuries
in an accident.
• Failure to replace seat belts after
an accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to personal injury or death. Replace
your seat belts after being in an
accident as soon as possible.
3 14
B200A02NF
WARNING
You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly
across your hips, not on your waist.
If the lap belt is located too high on
your waist, it may increase the
chance of injury in the event of a
collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one
should be over and the other under,
as shown in the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the
arm nearest the door.
B210A01NF-1
To release the seat belt:
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button (1) in the locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to
be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
Safety features of your vehicle
CAUTION - Cargo
A
Be sure that the cargo is securely
loaded in the rear cargo area. Doing
not so may damage the rear center
safety belt in sudden stop or certain
collisions.
C
B
CAUTION
ORB031035N
When using the rear center seat
belt, the buckle with the “CENTER”
mark must be used.
WARNING
ORB031036N
3 Point rear center belt (if equipped)
To fasten the rear center belt
Insert the tongue plate (A) into the open
end of the buckle (B) until an audible
“click" is heard, indicating the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckles. If any tongue
plate or buckle is not locked, it will
increase the chance of injury in the
event of collision.
D
ORB031032N
Pull and insert the tongue plate (C) into
the open end of the buckle (D) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating the
latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.
There will be an audible “click” when the
tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt
automatically adjusts to the proper length
only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips,
if you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let you
move around. If there is a sudden stop or
impact, the belt will lock into position. It
will also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
1
D
ORB031037N
ORB031038N
OVI039066
To release the rear center belt
Press the release button (1) on the buckle (D) and remove the tongue plate from
the buckle (D).
To disconnect the rear center belt
Insert a key or narrow-ended tool into the
groove located on buckle.
Lap belt (if equipped)
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten a 2-point static type belt, insert
the metal tab (1) into the locking buckle
(2). There will be an audible "click" when
the tab locks into the buckle. Check to
make sure the belt is properly locked and
that the belt is not twisted.
✽ NOTICE
Always connect the tongue plate to the
buckle even when not in use.
3 16
Safety features of your vehicle
Lengthen
Shorten
OHM039105N
Too high
ORBC030009
B210A02NF-1
When using the rear center seat belt, the
buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be
used.
To release the seat belt:
When you want to release the seat belt,
press the button (1) in the locking buckle.
WARNING
Correct
Shorten
B220B01NF/H
With a 2-point static type seat belt, the
length must be adjusted manually so it
fits snugly around your body. Fasten the
belt and pull on the loose end to tighten.
The belt should be placed as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If
the belt is too high, it could increase the
possibility of your being injured in an
accident.
The center lap belt latching mechanism is different from those for the
rear seat shoulder belts. When fastening the rear seat shoulder belts
or the center lap belt, make sure
they are inserted into the correct
buckles to obtain maximum protection from the seat belt system and
assure proper operation.
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if
the occupant tries to lean forward too
quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock
into position. In certain frontal collisions,
the pre-tensioner will activate and pull
the seat belt into tighter contact against
the occupant's body.
OED030300
Pre-tensioner seat belt
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and
front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is
to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough.
WARNING
For your safety, be sure that the
belt webbing is not loose or twisted
and always sit properly on your
seat.
3 18
8KMB3311
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from a
pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly and adjusted to the proper
position. Please read and follow
all of the important information
and precautions about your vehicle’s occupant safety features –
including seat belts and air bags
– that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly.
✽ NOTICE
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates the
SRS air bag is connected with the pretensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag
warning light
on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the ignition switch
has been turned to the ON position,
and then it should turn off.
CAUTION
If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS air bag. If
the SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or
if it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pretensioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed to
operate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat belts,
of any type, should always be
replaced after they have been
worn during a collision.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation.
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been activated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be done
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat belt
system in any manner.
(Continued)
3 20
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and
failure to heed the warnings not
to strike, modify, inspect, replace,
service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead
to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury.
• Always wear the seat belts when
driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Seat belt precautions
WARNING
All occupants of the vehicle must
wear their seat belts at all times.
Seat belts and child restraints
reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injuries for all occupants in the
event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants
could be shifted too close to a
deploying air bag, strike the interior
structure or be thrown from the
vehicle. Properly worn seat belts
greatly reduce these hazards.
Always follow the precautions
about seat belts, air bags and occupant seat contained in this manual.
Safety features of your vehicle
Infant or small child
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant seats must be properly
placed and installed in the rear seat. For
more information about the use of these
restraints, refer to “Child restraint system” in this section.
WARNING
Every person in your vehicle needs
to be properly restrained at all
times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your
arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child
against the interior. Always use a
child restraint appropriate for your
child's height and weight.
✽ NOTICE
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly
restrained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your
country. Before buying any child
restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets Safety
Standards of your country. The restraint
must be appropriate for your child's
height and weight. Check the label on
the child restraint for this information.
Refer to “Child restraint system” in this
section.
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occupy
the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should
be fastened snug on the hips and as low
as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A
child's squirming could put the belt out of
position. Children are afforded the most
safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper restraint
system in the rear seat. If a larger child
(over age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoulder
belt and the seat should be placed in the
rearmost position. Children age 12 and
under should be restrained securely in
the rear seat. NEVER place a child age
12 and under in the front seat. NEVER
place a rear facing child seat in the front
seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child’s neck or face, try placing the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. If
the shoulder belt still touches their face
or neck they need to be returned to a
child restraint system.
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Shoulder belts
on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to be
in contact with a child’s neck or
face while the vehicle is in
motion.
• If seat belts are not properly worn
and adjusted on children, there is
a risk of death or serious injury.
Pregnant women
The use of a seat belt is recommended
for pregnant women to lessen the chance
of injury in an accident. When a seat belt
is used, the lap belt portion should be
placed as low and snugly as possible on
the hips, not across the abdomen. For
specific recommendations, consult a
physician.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never place
the lap portion of the safety belt
over the area of the abdomen
where the fetus is located or above
the abdomen where the belt could
crush the fetus during an impact.
3 22
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up
and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Safety features of your vehicle
Care of seat belts
WARNING
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against
your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is
reclined, the greater the chance
that an occupant's hips will slide
under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's
neck could strike the shoulder belt.
Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their seats,
properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.
Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING
When you return the rear seatback
to its upright position after the rear
seatback was folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the
webbing or buckle does not get
caught or pinched in the rear seat.
A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and
could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in
serious injury.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind.
Any damaged parts should be replaced
as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.
If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution
and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong
detergents or abrasives should not be
used because they may damage and
weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage
is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed
to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in the
front seat. Larger children not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat belts
provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your country. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat.
You must use a commercially available
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Safety Standards of
your country.
Child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts
or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or ISOFIX
anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
3 24
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat
and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow
all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
WARNING
• A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never
install a child or infant seat on the
front passenger's seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger-side air bag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an infant
or child seat. Thus only use a
child restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
• A seat belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is
left in a closed vehicle on a sunny
day, even if the outside temperature does not feel hot. Be sure to
check the seat cover and buckles
before placing a child there.
• When the child restraint system
is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat
belt so that it will not be thrown
forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
• Children may be seriously injured
or killed by an inflating air bag.
All children, even those too large
for child restraints, must ride in
the rear seat.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries:
• Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck
by an inflating air bag resulting in
serious or fatal injuries.
• Always follow the child restraint
system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of
the child restraint.
• Always make sure the child seat
is secured properly in the car and
your child is securely restrained
in the child seat.
• Never hold a child in your arms or
lap when riding in a vehicle. The
violent forces created during a
crash will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the car’s interior.
• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash,
the belt could press deep into the
child causing serious internal
injuries.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle – not even for a short
time. The car can heat up very
quickly, resulting in serious
injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move,
entangle themselves in the windows, or lock themselves or others inside the vehicle.
• Never allow two children, or any
two persons, to use the same
seat belt.
• Children often squirm and reposition themselves improperly.
Never let a child ride with the
shoulder belt under their arm or
behind their back. Always properly position and secure children in
the rear seat.
• Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a
moving vehicle. During a collision or sudden stop, the child
can be violently thrown against
the vehicle’s interior, resulting in
serious injury.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never use an infant carrier or a
child safety seat that "hooks"
over a seatback, it may not provide adequate security in an accident.
• Seat belts can become very hot,
especially when the car is parked
in direct sunlight. Always check
seat belt buckles before fastening them over a child.
• After an accident, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat belt,
tether anchor and lower anchor.
• If there is not enough space to
place the child restraint system
because of the driver's seat,
install the child restraint system
in the rear right seat.
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
For safety reasons, we recommend that
the child restraint system be used in the
rear seats.
Rearward-facing child restraint system
WARNING
CRS09
Forward-facing child restraint system
ORB030026
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3 26
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger
seat, because of the danger that an
inflating passenger-side air bag
could impact the rear-facing child
restraint and kill the child.
WARNING - Child seat
installation
• A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not
properly restrained in the child
restraint. Before installing the
child restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
• If the seat belt does not operate
as described in this section, have
the system checked immediately
by your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual's
instructions regarding child
restraint systems and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
E2BLD347
Installing a child restraint system
with a lap belt (on the center rear
seat) (if equipped)
To install a child restraint system on the
center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on the
center rear seat.
2. Extend the latch plate tongue of the
lap belt.
3. Route the lap belt through the restraint
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
4. Buckle the seat belt and adjust the lap
belt for a snug hold on the child
restraint by pulling on the loose end of
the belt. After installation of the child
restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed.
E2MS103005
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on the
outboard or center rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in the
seat and route the lap/shoulder belt
around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
OEN036101
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into
the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”
sound.
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
Child seat restraint suitability for seat position using the seat belt - For Europe
Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your
children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table.
Age group
OEN036104
3. Buckle the seat belt and allow the seat
belt to take up any slack. After installation of the child restraint system, try to
move it in all directions to be sure the
child restraint system is securely
installed.
If you need to tighten the belt, pull more
webbing toward the retractor. When you
unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to
retract, the retractor will automatically
revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.
3 28
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 - 9 months)
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 - 2 years)
I : 9 kg to 18 kg
(9 months - 4 years)
II & III : 15 kg to 36 kg
(4 - 12 years)
Front passenger
Seating position
Rear outboard
Rear center
UF
U
U
UF
U
U
UF
U
U
UF
U
U
U : Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF : Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this
mass group
Safety features of your vehicle
4 Door
WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
to the car and the child is not properly restrained in the child restraint.
Always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
ORB030024
5 Door
ORB030025
ORB031033
Securing a child restraint seat with
“Tether Anchor” system
(if equipped)
Child restraint hook holders are located
on the package tray or on the floor
behind the rear seats.
1. Route the child restraint seat tether
strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the
headrest and between the headrest
posts, otherwise route the tether strap
over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
appropriate child restraint hook holder
and tighten to secure the seat.
WARNING - Tether strap
Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether anchor
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load caused
by multiple seats may cause the
tether or anchorage points to
break, causing serious injury or
death.
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING - Child restraint
check
Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and
pulling it in different directions.
Incorrectly fitted child restraints
may swing, twist, tip or separate
causing death or serious injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts or harnesses or
for attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct tether
anchor.
3 30
ISOFIX Anchor
Position Indicator
ISOFIX Anchor
B230D01NF
ORB030023
Securing a child restraint system
with “ISOFIX” system and “Tether
Anchorage” system (if equipped)
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need
to use the standard adult seat belt to
secure the seat in the vehicle. This
enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of
easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it
has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECER44.
There are ISOFIX symbols located on
the lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate the
position of the ISOFIX anchors for child
restraints so equipped.
Safety features of your vehicle
Both rear outboard seats are equipped
with a pair of ISOFIX anchorages as well
as a corresponding top tether anchorage
on the back side of the back rest. The
ISOFIX anchorages are located between
seat cushion and back rest, marked with
the ISOFIX icon.
For installation, CRS ISOFIX connecters
have to engage with the vehicles ISOFIX
anchorages (listen for a CLICK, check
potential visual indicators on the CRS
and cross-check by pulling).
CRS with universal approval to ECE-R
44 need to be fixed additionally with a top
tether strap connected to the corresponding top tether anchorage point in the
back rest.
The installing and the use of a child-seat
has to be done according to the
installing-manual, which is added to the
ISOFIX-seat.
WARNING
• When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a child
restraint system in the rear seat,
all unused vehicle rear seat belt
metal latch plates or tabs must be
latched securely in their seat belt
buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind
the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking
hold of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to reach
the unretracted seat belts which
may result in strangulation and a
serious injury or death to the
child in the child restraint.
• Do not place anything around the
ISOFIX anchors. Also make sure
that the seat belt is not caught in
the ISOFIX anchors.
To secure the child restraint seat
1. To engage the child restraint seat to
the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child
restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX
anchor. Listen for the audible “click”
sound.
CAUTION
Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by
the ISOFIX-seat latch and ISOFIX
anchor during installation.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat. (Refer to the previous page.)
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the center of the rear seat
using the vehicle's ISOFIX
anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are
only provided for the left and
right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX
anchors by attempting to attach a
child restraint seat in the middle
of the rear seat to the ISOFIX
anchors.
In a crash, the child restraint seat
ISOFIX attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the child
restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may
break, causing serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
3 32
(Continued)
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a child restraint
lower anchorage point. The
improper increased load may
cause the anchorage points or
tether anchor to break, causing
serious injury or death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to
the appropriate locations shown
in the illustration.
• Always follow the installation and
use instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child
restraint.
Safety features of your vehicle
Child seat restraint suitability for vehicle ISOFIX positions- For Europe
vehicle ISOFIX positions
Mass Group
Size Class
Fixture
Front Passenger
Carrycot
0 : UP to 10kg
0+ : UP to 13kg
I : 9 to 18kg
Rear Outboard
(Driver side)
Rear Outboard
(Passenger side)
Rear Center
F
ISO/L1
-
X
X
-
G
ISO/L2
-
X
X
-
E
ISO/R1
-
IUF
IUF
-
E
ISO/R1
-
IUF
IUF
-
D
ISO/R2
-
IUF
IUF
-
C
ISO/R3
-
X
X
-
D
ISO/R2
-
IUF
IUF
-
C
ISO/R3
-
X
X
-
B
ISO/F2
-
IUF
IUF
-
B1
ISO/F2X
-
IUF
IUF
-
A
ISO/F3
-
IUF
IUF
-
IUF = Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of
universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X = ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint system in this mass group and/or this size class.
* Both ISO/R2 and ISO/R3 are able to be set up only at the
foremost position of the passenger seat.
* ISOFIX child restraint system size classes and fixtures
A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height
720mm)
B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler CRS
(height 650mm)
B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface
Shape Forward-Facing toddler CRS (height 650mm)
C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler CRS
E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing CRS
F - ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position CRS (carry-cot)
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Driver’s front air bag*
(2) Passenger’s front air bag*
(3) Side impact air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
* : if equipped
WARNING
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and
severity of injury in the event of a
collision or rollover.
* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYF039050
3 34
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if
necessary) only when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON or START
position.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the event of
a serious frontal or side collision (if
equipped with side air bag or curtain
air bag) in order to help protect the
occupants from serious physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which the
air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors
produce an electronic deployment/
inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or
objects which your vehicle hits in the
collision. The determining factors are
not limited to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging
out of their storage compartments after
the collision.
• In order to help provide protection in a
severe collision, the air bags must
inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag
inflation is a consequence of the
extremely short time in which a collision
occurs and the need to inflate the air
bag between the occupant and the
vehicle structures before the occupant
impacts those structures. This speed of
inflation reduces the risk of serious or
life-threatening injuries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of air
bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include facial
abrasions, bruises and broken bones
because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great
deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal
injuries, especially if the occupant
is positioned excessively close to
the steering wheel.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal injury
or death caused by deploying air
bags in a collision, the driver
should sit as far back from the
steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passengers
should always move their seats
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of collision, and passengers may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not in
proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries including facial or bodily
abrasions, injuries from broken
glasses or burns.
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make a
loud noise and they leave smoke and
powder in the air inside of the vehicle.
This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air
bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and the
air bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possible
after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder.
Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin
(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the
case, wash and rinse with cold water
immediately and consult a doctor if the
symptom persists.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the air
bag related parts in the steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof rails
above the front and rear doors are
very hot. To prevent injury, do not
touch the air bag storage area’s
internal components immediately
after an air bag has inflated.
3 36
■ Type A
In addition, do not place front-facing child
restraints in the front passenger’s seat
either. If the front passenger air bag
inflates, it could cause serious or fatal
injuries to the child.
WARNING
R5LDA004
■ Type B
OYDESA2042
Do not install a child restraint on the
front passenger’s seat.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in the front passenger’s seat. If the air
bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or
fatal injury.
• NEVER use a rearward facing
child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of
it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to
the CHILD can occur.
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an air bag in
front of it!
• Never put a child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the front
passenger air bag inflates, it can
cause serious or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or curtain
air bags, be sure to install the
child restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible,
and securely lock the child
restraint system in position.
Inflation of side and/or curtain air
bags could cause serious injury
or death to an infant or child.
Safety features of your vehicle
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require air
bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light " " on
the instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position, after which
the SRS air bag warning light " "
should go out.
W7-147
OYF039055L
Air bag warning light
SRS components and functions
The purpose of the air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert you of
a potential problem with your air bag Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned ON,
the warning light should illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly when
you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for
approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehicle is
in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
The SRS consists of the following components:
1. Driver's front air bag module*
2. Passenger's front air bag module*
3. Side air bag modules*
4. Curtain air bag modules*
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors*
*: if equipped
WARNING
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the ignition
switch is in ON position.
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Driver’s front air bag (2)
Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L
B240B02L
B240B03L
The front air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering wheel
and in the front passenger's panel above
the glove box. When the SRSCM detects
a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically deploy
the front air bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
air bags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination
with a properly worn seat belt, slows the
driver's or the passenger's forward
motion, reducing the risk of head and
chest injury.
3 38
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and
the ability to steer or operate other controls.
Safety features of your vehicle
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
B240B05L
WARNING
• Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette
holder, sticker, etc.) on the front
passenger's panel above the
glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects
may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the
instrument panel surface.
It may become a dangerous projectile and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
• If an air bag deploys, there may
be a loud noise followed by a fine
dust released in the vehicle.
These conditions are normal and
are not hazardous - the air bags
are packed in this fine powder.
The dust generated during air
bag deployment may cause skin
or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons.
Always wash all exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm
water and a mild soap after an
accident in which the air bags
were deployed.
• The SRS can function only when
the ignition switch is in the ON
position. If the SRS "
" warning
light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, or after the
engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the ignition
key. Never remove or replace the
air bag related fuse(s) when the
ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS “
” warning
light to illuminate.
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s front air bag
Passenger’s front air bag
WARNING
ORB030010
ORB030011
Driver's and passenger's front air
bag
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt system alone in
case of a frontal impact of sufficient
severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System
and the lap/shoulder belts at both the
driver and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" or "AIR
BAG" embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the
glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags installed
under the pad covers in the center of the
steering wheel and the passenger's side
front panel above the glove box.
3 40
Always use seat belts and child
restraints – every trip, every time,
everyone! Air bags inflate with considerable force and in the blink of
an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain
maximum benefit from the air bag.
Even with air bags, improperly belted and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the air bag
inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and
occupant safety contained in this
manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or
fatal injuries and receive the maximum safety benefit from your
restraint system:
• Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat.
• ABC – Always Buckle Children in
the back seat. It is the safest
place for children of any age to
ride.
• Front and side air bags can injure
occupants improperly positioned
in the front seats.
(Continued)
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front air bags,
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
• You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags. Improperly
positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by
inflating air bags.
• Never lean against the door or
center console – always sit in an
upright position.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, and the front passenger's
panel above the glove box,
because any such object could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags
or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the SRS air bag warning light
“
”remains illuminated while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the air bag system as
soon as possible.
• Air bags can only be used once –
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.
• The SRS is designed to deploy
the front air bags only when an
impact is sufficiently severe and
when the impact angle is less
than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
Additionally, the air bags will only
deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
• Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rearimpact or rollover crashes. In
addition, front air bags will not
deploy in frontal crashes below
the deployment threshold.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• A child restraint system must
never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be
severely injured or killed by an air
bag deployment in case of an
accident.
• Children age 12 and under must
always be properly restrained in
the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must
be seated in the front seat, he or
she must be properly belted and
the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
• For maximum safety protection in
all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should
always wear their seat belts
whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position
to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a
crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while
the vehicle is in motion.
(Continued)
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious or fatal
injury in a crash. All occupants
should sit upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
• The SRS air bag system must
deploy very rapidly to provide
protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of
not wearing a seat belt, the air
bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
The side impact air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The
side impact air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact situations.
Front
WARNING
ORBC030021
OYF039057N
Side impact air bag (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
impact air bag in each front seat. The
purpose of the air bag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and the front passenger
with additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
3 42
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors,
put their arms on the doors, stretch
their arms out of the window, or
place objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with side
and/or curtain air bags.
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• The side impact air bag is supplemental to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for
them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while
the vehicle is in motion. The air
bags deploy only in certain side
impact conditions severe enough
to cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
• For best protection from the side
impact air bag system and to
avoid being injured by the
deploying side impact air bag,
both front and all rear (if
equipped) seat occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed
on the steering wheel at the 9:00
and 3:00 positions. The passenger’ arms and hands should be
placed on their laps.
• Do not use any accessory seat
covers.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Use of seat covers could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness of
the system.
• Do not install any accessories on
the side or near the side impact
air bag.
• Do not place any objects over the
air bag or between the air bag
and yourself.
• Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause
injury if the supplemental side
impact air bag inflates.
• To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag
that may result in personal injury,
avoid impact to the side impact
sensor when the ignition switch
is on.
• If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked
and repaired by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer because your
vehicle is equipped with side
impact air bags.
OYF039026
OYF039058N
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and
the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain
air bags are not designed to deploy in all
side impact situations, collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in most
rollover situations.
3 44
WARNING
• In order for side and curtain air
bags to provide the best protection, front seat occupants and
outboard rear occupants should
sit in an upright position with the
seat belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should sit in
a proper child restraint system in
the rear seat.
• When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats, they must be
seated in the proper child
restraint system. Make sure to
position the child restraint system as far away from the door
side as possible, and secure the
child restraint system in a locked
position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not allow the passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and passengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or
curtain air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Failure to follow the above instructions can result in injury or death to
the vehicle occupants in an accident.
Safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a
collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection.
These include rear impacts, second or
third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts.
1
2
3
ORB030013/ORB030014/ORB030015/ORB030018
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects to
impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
This may cause unexpected air
bag deployment, which could
result in serious personal injury
or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered in
any way, the air bags may deploy
when they should not or they may
not deploy when they should,
causing severe injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to perform
maintenance on or around the air
bag sensors. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
3 46
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed
due to the deformation of the
front bumper, body or B and C pillars where side collision sensors
are installed. Have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Your vehicle has been designed
to absorb impact and deploy the
air bag(s) in certain collisions.
Installing bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect
your vehicle’s collision and air
bag deployment performance.
1JBA3513
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a
frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front
collision.
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3514
Although the front air bags (driver’s and
front passenger’s air bags) are designed
to inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a
sufficient impact. Side impact and curtain
air bags are designed to inflate only in
side impact collisions, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved roads,
the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully
on unimproved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
1JBA3515
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags are
designed not to deploy in such cases
because they may not provide benefits
beyond the protection of the seat belts
in such collisions.
1LDA2057
Side impact and curtain air bags
(if equipped)
Side impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the strength, speed or
angles of impact resulting from a side
impact collision.
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
OBH038058
1JBA3516
OBH038060
• Frontal air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move to the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, frontal air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
However, side impact and curtain air
bags may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
• In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would not
be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not
deploy any air bags.
3 48
Safety features of your vehicle
1JBA3517
1JBA3522
1JBA3518
• Just before impact, drivers often brake
heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the
front portion of the vehicle causing it to
“ride” under a vehicle with a higher
ground clearance. Air bags may not
inflate in this "under-ride" situation
because deceleration forces that are
detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such “under-ride”
collisions.
• Air bags do not inflate in rollover accidents because vehicle can not detect
rollover accident.
However, side and/or curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over after side impact collision.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated to one area and
the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
and so there are no parts you can safely
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag
warning light
does not illuminate
when you turn the ignition ON, or if it continuously remains on, have your vehicle
immediately inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any
work on the steering wheel, the front
passenger's panel, front seats and roof
rails must be performed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper handling of
the SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
3 50
WARNING
• Modification to SRS components
or wiring, including the addition
of any kind of badges to the pad
covers or modifications to the
body structure, can adversely
affect SRS performance and lead
to possible injury.
• For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or
one which has been moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely affect
the air bag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
• No objects should be placed over
or near the air bag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel,
and the front passenger's panel
above the glove box, because any
such object could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a crash severe enough
to cause the air bags to inflate.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the air bags inflate, they must
be replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not tamper with or disconnect
SRS wiring, or other components
of the SRS system. Doing so
could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or
by rendering the SRS inoperative.
• If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the
vehicle must be scrapped, certain
safety precautions must be
observed.
An
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk
of personal injury.
• If your car was flooded and has
soaked carpeting or water on the
flooring, you shouldn't try to start
the engine; have the car towed to
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Safety features of your vehicle
Additional safety precautions
• Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a foldeddown back seat. All occupants should
sit upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
• Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the
inside of the vehicle, against other
occupants, or out of the vehicle.
• Each seat belt is designed to
restrain one occupant. If more than
one person uses the same seat belt,
they could be seriously injured or killed
in a collision.
• Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Passengers should not place hard
or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying
hard or sharp objects on your lap or in
your mouth can result in injuries if an
air bag inflates.
• Keep occupants away from the air
bag covers. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor. If occupants are too close to the
air bag covers, they could be injured if
the air bags inflate.
• Do not attach or place objects on or
near the air bag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or
side air bag covers could interfere with
the proper operation of the air bags.
• Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
• Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring harnesses.
• Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a
crash. All infants and children should
be properly restrained in appropriate
child safety seats or seat belts in the
rear seat.
WARNING
• Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be
shifted too close to a deploying
air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with
your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on
the floor.
Adding equipment to or modifying
your air bag-equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
*
* if equipped
ORB030016L
Air bag warning label
(if equipped)
Air bag warning labels are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risk of air bag system.
Note that these government warnings
focus on the risk to children, we also
want you to be aware of the risks which
adults are exposed to. Those have been
described in previous pages.
3 52
Keys / 4-3
Smart key / 4-6
Remote keyless entry / 4-10
Door locks / 4-13
Trunk / 4-17
Tailgate / 4-20
Windows / 4-23
Hood / 4-28
Features of your vehicle
Fuel filler lid / 4-30
Sunroof / 4-33
Steering wheel / 4-37
Mirrors / 4-39
Instrument cluster / 4-43
Rear parking assist system / 4-69
Rearview camera / 4-72
Hazard warning flasher / 4-73
Lighting / 4-74
Wipers and washers / 4-81
Interior light / 4-84
Defroster / 4-87
Manual climate control system / 4-88
Automatic climate control system / 4-97
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-104
4
Storage compartment / 4-107
Interior features / 4-109
Exterior features / 4-114
Audio system / 4-116
4
Features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
KEYS
Record your key number
Key operations
The key code number is
stamped on the key
code tag attached to the
key set. Should you lose
your keys, we recommend that you contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Remove the key code
tag and store it in a safe place. Also,
record the key code number and keep it
in a safe and handy place, but not in the
vehicle.
Used to start the engine, lock and unlock
the doors.
WARNING
- Ignition key (Smart key)
Leaving children unattended in a
vehicle with the ignition key (smart
key) is dangerous even if the key is
not in the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button is in
the ACC or ON position. Children
copy adults and they could place
the key in the ignition switch or
press the ENGINE START/STOP
button. The ignition key (smart key)
would enable children to operate
power windows or other controls,
or even make the vehicle move,
which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave
the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine
is running.
WARNING
Use only HYUNDAI original parts
for the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return to
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to operate
causing damage to the starter
motor and possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
4 3
Features of your vehicle
Immobilizer system (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system to
reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle
use.
Your immobilizer system is comprised of
a small transponder in the ignition key
and electronic devices inside the vehicle.
With the immobilizer system, whenever
you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks
and determines and verifies if the ignition
key is valid or not.
If the key is determined to be valid, the
engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid, the
engine will not start.
To activate the immobilizer system:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
The immobilizer system activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for
your vehicle, the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer system:
Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave
this number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use the
key with other immobilizer keys around.
Otherwise the engine may not start or
may stop soon after it starts. Keep each
key separate in order to avoid a starting
malfunction.
4 4
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
The engine may not start because
the metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from transmitting normally.
✽ NOTICE
If you need additional keys or lose your
keys, consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is designed
to give years of trouble-free service,
however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity
and rough handling. Immobilizer
system malfunction could occur.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust the
immobilizer system because it
could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction and should only
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improper
alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system
are not covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
4 5
Features of your vehicle
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)
OYF049302N
OYF049302N
OYF049303N
With a smart key, you can lock or unlock
a door (and trunk/tailgate) and even start
the engine without inserting the key.
The functions of buttons on a smart key
are similar to the remote keyless entry.
(Refer to the “Remote keyless entry” in
this section.)
To remove the mechanical key, press and
hold the release button and remove the
mechanical key.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put the
key into the hole and push it until a click
sound is heard.
Smart key functions
With the smart key, you can lock and
unlock the vehicle doors (and trunk/tailgate), and the smart key enables starting
of the engine as well. Detailed information follows:
4 6
ORB040001
Locking
Using the door handle switch
Pressing the button of the front outside
door handles with all doors (and trunk/
tailgate) closed and any door unlock,
locks all the doors (and trunk/tailgate). If
all doors and trunk are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors are locked.
Features of your vehicle
However, if any door remains open, the
doors won't lock and the chime will sound
for 3 seconds. Close the door and try
again to lock the doors.
If trunk/tailgate remains open, the hazard
warning light won't operate. After this,
trunk/tailgate is closed, the hazard warning lights blink once.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.)
from the outside door handle. If you want
to make sure that a door has locked or
not, you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside
door handle.
Even though you press the outside door
handle buttons, the doors will not lock
and the chime will sound for 3 seconds if
any of following occur:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in ACC or ON
position.
• Any door except the trunk/tailgate is
open.
Using the button on the smart key
All doors (and trunk/tailgate) are locked if
the lock button(1) is pressed. If all doors
(and trunk/tailgate) are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors are locked.
However, if any door (or trunk/tailgate)
remains open, the hazard warning lights
will not operate. If all doors (and trunk/
tailgate) are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
blink once.
Unlocking
Using the door handle switch
Press the button of the front outside door
handles with all doors (and trunk/tailgate)
closed and locked, unlocks all the doors
(and trunk/tailgate). The hazard warning
lights blink twice to indicate that all doors
(and trunk/tailgate) are unlocked. The
button will only operate when the smart
key is within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the
outside door handle.
When the smart key is recognized in the
area of 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the front
outside door handle, other people can
also open the door without possession of
the smart key.
After pressing the button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open any
door within 30 seconds.
Using the button on the smart key
All doors (and trunk/tailgate) are
unlocked if the unlock button (2) is
pressed. The hazard warning lights will
blink twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked.
After pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open any
door within 30 seconds.
4 7
Features of your vehicle
Trunk unlocking (4 Door)
Using the trunk handle switch
If you are within 0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from
the outside trunk handle with your smart
key in your possession, the trunk will
unlock and open when you press the
trunk handle switch. Once the trunk is
opened and then closed, the trunk will be
locked automatically.
If the trunk is closed with the smart key in
the trunk, the warning chime will sound
for about 5 seconds and the trunk will not
locked.
Tailgate unlocking (5 Door)
Using the tailgate handle switch
If you are within 0.7 m ~ 1 m (28 ~ 40 in.)
from the outside tailgate handle, with
your smart key in possession, the tailgate will unlock and open when you
press the tailgate handle switch.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed when all doors are locked, the tailgate will lock automatically.
Using the button on the smart key
The trunk is opened if the trunk unlock
button (3) is pressed for more than 1 second. Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
Using the button on the smart key
The tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate
unlock button (3) is pressed for more
than 1 second. Once the tailgate is
opened and then closed when all doors
are locked, the tailgate will lock automatically.
❈ The word “HOLD” is written on the button to inform you that you must press
and hold the button for 1 second.
❈ The word “HOLD” is written on the button to inform you that you must press
and hold the button for 1 second.
Start-up
You can start the engine without inserting
the key. For detailed information refer to
“Engine start/stop button” in section 5.
4 8
Smart key precautions
✽ NOTICE
• If, for some reason, you happen to lose
your smart key, you will not be able to
start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if
necessary, and contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and key to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer to protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any of
following occur:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the smart key.
- You keep the smart key near a
mobile two-way radio system or a
cellular phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the mechanical key. If you have a
problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the smart key could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the smart key and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart
key.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
✽ NOTICE
OBH043004
Battery replacement
A smart key battery should last for several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with
a new one. If you are unsure how to use
your smart key or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
The circuit inside the smart key can
have a problem if exposed to moisture
or static electricity. If you are unsure
how to use your smart key or replace the
battery,
contact
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can cause the
smart key to malfunction. Be sure to
use the correct battery.
• Circuits inside the smart key may
develop problems when dropped,
exposed to moisture or static
electricity.
• If you suspect that your smart key
might have sustained some damage,
or you feel your smart key is not
working correctly, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
4 9
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button is
pressed while all doors are closed.
The hazard warning lights blink once to
indicate that all doors are locked.
However, if any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights will not operate. If
all doors are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
blink once.
ORBR043356
Remote keyless entry system
operations
To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold automatically.
To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
CAUTION
Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may
damage the key.
4 10
Unlock (2)
All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed.
The hazard warning lights will blink twice
to indicate that all doors are unlocked.
After depressing the button, the doors
will be locked automatically unless you
open any door within 30 seconds.
Trunk open (3)
The trunk is unlocked and opened if the
button is pressed for more than 1 second. Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automatically.
Tailgate unlock (3)
The tailgate is unlocked if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
After depressing the button, the tailgate
will be locked automatically unless you
open the tailgate by pressing the tailgate
handle switch within 30 seconds.
❈ The word “HOLD” is written on the button to inform you that you must press
and hold the button for 1 second.
Features of your vehicle
Transmitter precautions
✽ NOTICE
• The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 10 m [30 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door with
the ignition key. If you have a problem
with the transmitter, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If the transmitter is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone, the
signal from the transmitter could be
blocked by normal operation of your
cell phone or smart phone. This is
especially important when the phone
is active such as making call, receiving
calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing
the transmitter and your cell phone or
smart phone in the same pants or
jacket pocket and maintain adequate
distance between the two devices.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the keyless
entry system is inoperative due to
exposure to water or liquids, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to
changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance, it will
not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
4 11
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
OVF041213
Battery replacement
The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium battery which will normally last for several
years. When replacement is necessary,
use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently pry open the transmitter center
cover.
2. Replace the battery with a new battery
(CR2032). When replacing the battery,
make sure the battery position.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order
of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for transmitter reprogramming.
4 12
• The keyless entry system transmitter is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to
moisture or static electricity. If
you are unsure how to use your
transmitter or replace the battery,
contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
• To avoid damaging the transmitter, don't drop it, get it wet, or
expose it to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Features of your vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
✽ NOTICE
Unlock
Unlock
Lock
Lock
ORBR043301
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the front
of the vehicle to lock.
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door with
a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock
automatically. (if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter (or smart
key). (if equipped)
• Once the doors are unlocked, they may
be opened by pulling the door handle.
• When closing the door, push the door
by hand. Make sure that doors are
closed securely.
• In cold and wet climates, door locks
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating
temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to system
components.
ORB040002L
WARNING
• If you don't close the
securely, the door may
again.
• Be careful that someone's
and hands are not trapped
closing the door.
door
open
body
when
• To lock a door without the key, push the
inside door lock button (1) or central
door lock switch (if equipped) (2) to the
“Lock” position and close the door (3).
• If you lock the door with the central
door lock switch (2), all vehicle doors
will lock automatically. (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
Always remove the ignition key, engage
the parking brake, close all windows
and lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
4 13
Features of your vehicle
• Front door cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and the
door is open. (if equipped)
• A door cannot be locked if the smart
key is in the vehicle and any door is
open.
Driver’s door
Lock
WARNING - Door lock mal-
Unlock
function
ORB040003
Operating door locks from inside
the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The
red mark (2) on the door lock button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door
is locked properly, the red mark (2) on
the door lock button will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle
(3) outward.
4 14
If a power door lock ever fails to
function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following
techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
ORBC040004
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
Operate by depressing the central door
lock switch.
Features of your vehicle
• When pushing down on the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors
will unlock.
• If the key is in the ignition switch and
front door is open, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion (1)
of central door lock switch is pressed.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is open, the doors will not
lock even though the front portion(1) of
central door lock switch is pressed.
✽ NOTICE
If the doors are locked with the tranmitter or smart key, the doors cannot be
unlocked with the central door lock/
unlock switch. (if equipped)
WARNING - Doors
• The doors should always be fully
closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door.
Locked doors will also discourage potential intruders when the
vehicle stops or slows.
• Be careful when opening doors
and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians
approaching the vehicle in the
path of the door. Opening a door
when something is approaching
can cause damage or injury.
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicles
Leaving your vehicle unlocked can
invite theft or possible harm to you
or others from someone hiding in
your vehicle while you are gone.
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close all
windows and lock all doors when
leaving your vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape
the vehicle. Furthermore, children
might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to
the vehicle. Never leave children or
animals unattended in your vehicle.
4 15
Features of your vehicle
Speed sensing door lock system
(if equipped)
3. Close the rear door.
To open the rear door, pull the outside
door handle (1).
Even though the doors may be unlocked,
the rear door will not open by pulling the
inner door handle (2) until the rear door
child safety lock is unlocked.
All doors will be automatically locked
after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h.
And all doors will be automatically
unlocked when you turn the engine off or
when you remove the ignition key. (if
equipped)
WARNING - Rear door
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped)
All doors will be automatically unlocked
after an impact causes the air bags to
deploy.
4 16
locks
ORB040005
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help
prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle.
The rear door safety locks should be
used whenever children are in the vehicle.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located on
the rear edge of the door to the “Lock”
position. When the child safety lock is
in the “Lock (
)” position, rear door
will not open even though the inner
door handle is pulled inside the vehicle.
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and be
severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear
doors from the inside, the rear door
safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
TRUNK (4 DOOR)
ORB043007N
Opening the trunk
With the key
To open the trunk, insert the key and turn
it clockwise.
ORB043007
ORB040006
With the transmitter or smart key
• To open the trunk, press the trunk
unlock button for more than 1 second
on the transmitter.
• To open the trunk, press the trunk
unlock button for more than 1 second
on the smart key or press the button
(1) on the trunk handle with the smart
key in your possession.
With the trunk lid release lever
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle,
pull up the trunk lid release lever.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk is locked automatically.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
4 17
Features of your vehicle
Closing the trunk
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the
trunk lid is securely fastened, always
check by trying to pull it up again.
WARNING
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
trunk before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
trunk lift cylinders and attached
hardware if the trunk is not closed
prior to driving.
The trunk lid should be always kept
completely closed while the vehicle
is in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may
enter the car and serious illness or
death may result.
WARNING
No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk
is a very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
4 18
ORB040302
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release handle located
inside the trunk. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, moving the
handle in the direction of the arrow will
open the trunk.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
trunk safety release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk if you are accidentally
locked in the trunk.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. The
trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
4 19
Features of your vehicle
TAILGATE (5 DOOR)
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, door lock and
door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
WARNING
The tailgate swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
ORB041404
Opening the tailgate
With the key
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked by
turning the key to the "Lock" or
"Unlock" position.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and then
pulling up the hatch.
4 20
ORB041400
With the transmitter or smart key
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key) or
central door lock switch.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate unlock button on the transmitter is
pressed for more than 1 second.
• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key is
pressed for more than 1 second or if
the tailgate handle switch is pressed
with the smart key in your possession.
Once the tailgate is opened and then
closed when all doors are locked, the
tailgate locks automatically.
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened
by pressing the handle and pulling it
up.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.
Possible damage may occur to the
tailgate lift cylinders and attaching
hardware if the tailgate is not
closed prior to driving.
Features of your vehicle
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push
down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that
the tailgate is securely latched.
WARNING
Make sure your hands, feet and other
parts of your body are safely out of
the way before closing the tailgate.
CAUTION
Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing
the tailgate. It may damage the tailgate's latch.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open,
you will draw dangerous exhaust
fumes into your vehicle which can
cause serious injury or death to
vehicle occupants.
If you must drive with the tailgate
open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
ORB041401
WARNING - Rear cargo
area
Occupants should never ride in the
rear cargo area where no restraints
are available. To avoid injury in the
event of an accident or sudden
stops, occupants should always be
properly restrained.
Emergency tailgate safety release
(if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. When
someone is inadvertently locked in the
luggage compartment, the tailgate can
be opened by pushing the release lever
and pushing open the tailgate.
4 21
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• For emergencies, be fully aware
of the location of the emergency
tailgate safety release lever in the
vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally
locked in the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment
of the vehicle at any time. The
luggage compartment is a very
dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
• Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme
caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
4 22
Features of your vehicle
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch*
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch*
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down*
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch*
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, power windows
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
ORB040008L
4 23
Features of your vehicle
Power windows (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
• The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to operate.
Each door has a power window switch
that controls the door's window. The
driver has a power window lock switch
which can block the operation of passenger windows.
• The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition key is removed or turned to the
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the
front doors open, the power windows
cannot be operated within the 30 second period after ignition key removal
(if equipped: remote keyless entry system or smart key).
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if equipped)
in an open (or partially open position),
your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
buffeting or pulsation noise. This
noise is a normal occurrence and can be
reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows down,
partially lower both front windows
approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open,
slightly reduce the size of the sunroof
opening.
4 24
ORBC040092
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press down
or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).
Features of your vehicle
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling
up on the driver’s power window switch
for at least 1 second after the window
is completely closed.
ORBC040093
ORB040303
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Pressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the driver’s
window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up the switch momentarily
to the opposite direction of the window
movement.
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
(Driver's window)
Depressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second
detent position (6) completely lowers or
lifts the window even when the switch is
released. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
4 25
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when the
“auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.
WARNING
OUN026013
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body,
the window will detect the resistance and
will stop upward movement. The window
will then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8
in.) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is pulled
up continuously, the window will stop
upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the power
window switch is pulled up continuously
again within 5 seconds after the window
is lowered by the automatic window
reversal feature, the automatic window
reversal will not operate.
4 26
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to avoid
injuries or vehicle damage. If an
object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in
diameter is caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse
window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse
direction.
ORB040009
Power window lock button
(if equipped)
Except Europe
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the front and rear passengers' doors by pressing the power window lock switch to lock position
(pressed).
When the power window lock switch is
pressed, the driver's master control cannot operate the front and rear passengers' power windows.
For Europe
The driver can disable the power window
switches on the rear passengers' doors
by pressing the power window lock
switch to the lock position (pressed).
Features of your vehicle
When the power window lock switch is
pressed:
• The driver's master control can operate the front passenger's power window but cannot operate the rear passengers' power windows.
• The front passenger's control can
operate the front passenger's power
window.
• The rear passengers' control cannot
operate the rear passengers' power
window.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do not
open or close two windows or
more at the same time. This will
also ensure the longevity of the
fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and
the individual door window
switch in opposing directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.
WARNING - Windows
• NEVER leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children, when the Engine is running.
• NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very
young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows,
or otherwise injure themselves or
others.
• Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands, head and
other obstructions are safely out
of the way before closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play with
the power windows. Keep the driver’s door power window lock
switch in the LOCK position
(depressed). Serious injury can
result from unintentional window
operation by the child.
• Do not extend a face or arms outside through the window opening
while driving.
OSA028222
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the
window regulator handle clockwise or
counterclockwise.
WARNING
When opening or closing the windows, make sure your passenger's
arms, hands and body are safely
out of the way.
4 27
Features of your vehicle
HOOD
ORB040010
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
ORB040011
ORBC040012
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the
hood slightly, push the secondary latch
(1) to the left and lift the hood (2).
3. Pull the support rod from the hood.
4. Hold the hood open with the support
rod.
WARNING - Hot parts
WARNING
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting
the shift lever to the P(Park) position for automatic transaxle and to
the 1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for
manual transaxle, and setting the
parking brake.
4 28
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber will
help prevent you from being burned
by hot metal when the engine is
hot.
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the following:
• All filler caps in engine compartment
must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed
from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm
above the closed position and let it
drop. Make sure that it locks into place.
WARNING - Hood
• Before closing the hood, ensure
that all obstructions are removed
from the hood opening. Closing
the hood with an obstruction
present in the hood opening may
result in property damage or
severe personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or any
other combustible material in the
engine compartment. Doing so
may cause a heat-induced fire.
WARNING
• Always double check to be sure
that the hood is firmly latched
before driving away. If it is not
latched, the hood could fly open
while the vehicle is being driven,
causing a total loss of visibility,
which might result in an accident.
• The support rod must be inserted
completely into the hole provided
in the hood whenever you inspect
the engine compartment. This will
prevent the hood from falling and
possibly injuring you.
• Do not move the vehicle with the
hood in the raised position, as
vision is obstructed and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
4 29
Features of your vehicle
FUEL FILLER LID
Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until
it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap is
securely tightened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely
closed.
WARNING - Refueling
ORB040013
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel-filler lid must be opened from
inside the vehicle by pulling up on the
fuel-filler lid opener located on the front
floor area on the driver’s seat.
✽ NOTICE
If the fuel filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a
warm place and allow the ice to melt.
4 30
ORB040014
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull up the
fuel filler lid opener.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid (1) out to fully
open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel tank
cap (2) counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and thus subject you to the risk
of fire and burns. Always remove
the fuel cap carefully and slowly.
If the cap is venting fuel or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until
the condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle
automatically shuts off when
refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING - Refueling dangers
Automotive fuels are flammable
materials. When refueling, please
note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death by fire
or explosion.
• Read and follow all warnings at
the gas station facility.
• Before refueling note the location
of the Emergency Gasoline ShutOff, if available, at the gas station
facility.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle,
you should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching another metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling
since you can generate static
electricity by touching, rubbing
or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static electricity. Static electricity discharge
can ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part
of the vehicle, away from the fuel
filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.
• When
using
an
approved
portable fuel container, be sure to
place the container on the
ground prior to refueling. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the
filling is complete.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to
carry and store gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cellular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
• When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related to
the engine can ignite fuel vapors
causing a fire. Once refueling is
complete, check to make sure the
filler cap and filler door are
securely closed, before starting
the engine.
• DO NOT use matches or a lighter
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit
cigarette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
(Continued)
4 31
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the vehicle, and immediately contact the
manager of the gas station and
then contact the local fire department. Follow any safety instructions they provide.
4 32
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can result
in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control
system.
• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces
may damage the paint.
• After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of
an accident.
Features of your vehicle
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
✽ NOTICE
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
• After a vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water
that is on the sunroof before operating
it.
The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in the
slide position but can be slid while in a
tilt position.
CAUTION
ORB040015
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control lever located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
• Make sure the sunroof is closed
fully when leaving your vehicle.
If the sunroof is open, rain or
snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well
as cause theft.
WARNING
• Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could
result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death,
serious injury, or property damage.
• Do not allow children to operate
the sunroof.
4 33
Features of your vehicle
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever backward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will slide all the
way open.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
ORB040016
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof, pull the sunroof
control lever backward.
To close the sunroof, push or pull the
sunroof control lever forward or downward.
4 34
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever forward to
the second detent position and then
release it. The sunroof will automatically
close all the way.
To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
pull or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
ORBC040096
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not work
if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
WARNING
• Never try pinching any part of
your body intentionally to activate the Automatic reversal function.
• The Automatic reversal function
may not work if something gets
caught just before the sunroof
fully closes.
ORB040017
Tilting the sunroof
To open the sunroof, push the sunroof
control lever upward.
To close the sunroof, pull the sunroof
lever downward until the sunroof moves
to the desired position.
• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be damaged.
• While using sunroof for a long
time, a dust between sunroof and
roof panel can make a noise.
Open the sunroof and remove
regularly the dust using clean
cloth.
• The sunroof is made to slide
together with sunshade. Do not
leave the sunshade closed while
the sunroof is open.
WARNING - Sunroof
• Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by
a closing sunroof.
• Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside the sunroof
while driving.
• Make sure your hands and head
are safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
4 35
Features of your vehicle
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is
blown, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:
ORBC040097
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with the
glass panel automatically when the glass
panel is slid.You will have to close it manually if you want it closed.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and close the sunroof completely.
2. Release the control button.
3. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close (about 10 seconds) until the sunroof has returned
to the original position of tilt after it is
raised a little higher than the maximum tilt position. Then, release the
lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever forward
in the direction of close until the sunroof operates as follows;
TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →
SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control button.
When this is complete, the sunroof system is reset.
4 36
❈ For more detailed information, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is
blown, the sunroof may operate
improperly.
Features of your vehicle
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering
✽ NOTICE
Tilt steering (if equipped)
Power steering uses the motor to assist
you in steering the vehicle. If the engine
is off or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, the vehicle may
still be steered, but it will require
increased steering effort.
The motor driven power steering is controlled by power steering control unit
which sense the steering wheel torque,
steering wheel position and vehicle
speed to command the motor.
The steering wheel becomes heavier as
the vehicle’s speed increases and
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s speed
decreases for the better control of the
steering wheel.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:
• The EPS warning light does not illuminate.
• The steering wheel becomes heavier
after turning the ignition switch on.
This happens as the system performs
the EPS system diagnostics. When the
diagnostics is completed, the steering
wheel will return to its normal condition.
• Click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON or LOCK position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving
speed.
• If the Electric Power Steering System
does not operate normally, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may
become difficult to control or operate
abnormally. Take your vehicle to an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
• When you operate the steering wheel
in low temperature, abnormal noise
could occur. If temperature rises, the
noise will disappear. This is a normal
condition.
Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You can
also raise it to give your legs more room
when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be positioned
so that it is comfortable for you to drive,
while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of the
steering wheel while driving. You
may lose steering control and
cause severe personal injury,
death or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be
certain it is locked in position.
4 37
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do
not press on the horn with a sharppointed object.
ORB040018L
Manual type
To change the steering wheel angle, pull
down the lock release lever (1), adjust
the steering wheel to the desired angle
(2), then pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure
to adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position before driving.
4 38
ORBC040019
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the
horn regularly to be sure it operates
properly.
✽ NOTICE
To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn
will operate only when this area is
pressed.
Features of your vehicle
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center on
the view through the rear window. Make
this adjustment before you start driving.
WARNING - Rear visibility
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision through
the rear window.
ORB040020
WARNING
Do not modify the inside mirror and
do not install a wide mirror. It could
result in injury, during an accident
or deployment of the air bag.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start
driving and while the day/night lever is in
the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce the glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night driving.
Remember that you lose some rearview
clarity in the night position.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
(if equipped)
The electric chromic mirror automatically
controls the glare from the headlights of
the car behind you in nighttime or low
light driving conditions. The sensor
mounted in the mirror senses the light
level around the vehicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare is
automatically controlled by the sensor
mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted into R
(Reverse), the mirror will automatically
go to the brightest setting in order to
improve the drivers view behind the vehicle.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
4 39
Features of your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Indicator
Sensor
ORB040021
To operate the electric rearview mirror:
• Press the on/off button (1) to turn the
automatic dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the on/off button to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror
indicator light will turn off.
• The mirror defaults to the ON position
whenever the ignition switch is turned
on.
4 40
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to prevent
damage during an automatic car wash or
when passing in a narrow street.
WARNING - Rearview mirrors
• The right outside rearview mirror
is convex. In some countries, the
left outside rearview mirror is
also convex. Objects seen in the
mirror are closer than they
appear.
• Use your interior rearview mirror
or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing
lanes.
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the surface
of the glass. If ice should restrict
movement of the mirror, do not
force the mirror for adjustment. To
remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a
sponge or soft cloth with very warm
water.
CAUTION
If the mirror is jammed with ice, do
not adjust the mirror by force. Use
an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) to release the
frozen mechanism or move the
vehicle to a warm place and allow
the ice to melt.
WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehicle
is moving. This could result in loss
of control, and an accident which
could cause death, serious injury
or property damage.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is
depressed. Do not depress the
switch longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.
Doing so may damage the parts.
B510A01E
ORBC040023
Remote control
Manual type
The outside rearview mirrors are
equipped with a remote control for your
convenience. It is operated by the control
lever in the bottom front corner of the
window.
Before driving away, always check that
your mirrors are positioned so you can
see behind you, both to the left and right
sides, as well as directly behind your
vehicle. When using the mirror, always
exercise caution when attempting to
judge the distance of vehicles behind or
along side of you.
Electric type (if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror switch
allows you to adjust the position of the
left and right outside rearview mirrors. To
adjust the position of either mirror, move
the lever (1) to R or L to select the right
side mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point ( ) on the
mirror adjustment control to position the
selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into neutral position to prevent the inadvertent
adjustment.
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or
ON position for electric remote control
mirror to operate.
4 41
Features of your vehicle
ORB040024
Folding the outside rearview mirror
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the
housing of mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
4 42
Features of your vehicle
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
■ Type B
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Fuel gauge
6. Warning and indicator lights
7. Odometer/Trip computer*
* : if equipped
■ Type C
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
ORB043025R/ORBR043363R/ORBR043364R
4 43
Features of your vehicle
■ Type D
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
■ Type E
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Fuel gauge
6. Warning and indicator lights
7. Odometer/Trip computer*
* : if equipped
■ Type F
* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
ORB043026R/ORBR043366R/ORBR043367R
4 44
Features of your vehicle
Left-Hand drive type
ORB040332
Right-Hand drive type
ORB042332R
Instrument panel illumination
(if equipped)
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumination
control knob to adjust the instrument
panel illumination intensity.
4 45
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
Gauges
■ Type D
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the forward
speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in miles
per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
ORB040031
■ Type B
ORB040030
■ Type E
ORB040031L
■ Type C
ORB040031N
4 46
ORB040030L
■ Type F
ORB040030N
Features of your vehicle
Gasoline
■ Type A
Diesel
■ Type A
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer's RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.
ORB040304
ORB040305
Gasoline
■ Type B
Diesel
■ Type B
ORB040307
ORB040306
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or
over-revving the engine.
When the door is open, or if the engine is not started within 1 minute, the tachometer
pointer may move slightly in ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is running.
4 47
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
■ Type B
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The engine
coolant is under pressure and
could cause severe burns. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
ORB040308
ORB040034
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the
engine coolant when the ignition switch
is ON.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “If the engine overheats” in section 6.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in section 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is near empty.
On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light
may come on earlier than usual due to
the movement of fuel in the tank.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
the normal range area toward the
“H” position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
4 48
Features of your vehicle
TRIP A
WARNING - Fuel gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the
warning light comes on or when the
gauge indicator comes close to the
E level.
TRIP B
Distance to empty
Average fuel consumption
CAUTION
Avoid driving with a extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
ORBC040035
Trip computer
The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that
displays information related to driving on
the display when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. All stored driving information (except odometer) is reset if the
battery is disconnected.
Instant fuel consumption
Average speed
Elapsed time
Outside temperature*
ECO ON/OFF*
* if equipped
4 49
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
ORB040036
ORB040037
ORB040038
Odometer (km or mi.)
The odometer indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
You will also find the odometer useful to
determine when periodic maintenance
should be performed.
The odometer is always displayed until
the display is turned off.
Tripmeter (km or mi.)
TRIP A : Tripmeter A
TRIP B : Tripmeter B
This mode indicates the distance of individual trips selected since the last tripmeter reset.
The meter's working range is from 0.0 to
9999.9 km (0.0 to 9999.9 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A or
TRIP B) is being displayed, clears the
tripmeter to zero (0.0).
Distance to empty (km or mi.)
This mode indicates the estimated distance to empty based on the current fuel
in the fuel tank and the amount of fuel
delivered to the engine. When the
remaining distance is below 50 km (30
miles), “---” will be displayed.
The meter’s working range is from 50 to
999 km (30 to 999 miles).
4 50
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
ORB040039
ORB040040
ORB040041
Average fuel consumption (if equipped)
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used and
the distance since the last average consumption reset. The total fuel used is calculated from the fuel consumption input.
For an accurate calculation, drive more
than 50 m (0.03 miles).
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average fuel consumption is being displayed, clears the average
fuel consumption to zero (--.-).
If the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after
refueled more than 6 l, the average fuel
consumption will be cleared to zero (--.-).
Instant fuel consumption
(l/100 km or MPG)
This mode calculates the instant fuel
consumption every 2 seconds from the
driving distance and quantity of fuel
injection.
Average speed (km/h or MPH)
This mode calculates the average speed
of the vehicle since the last average
speed reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
average speed keeps going while the
engine is running.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the average speed is
being displayed, clears the average
speed to zero (---).
4 51
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
ORB040042
ORB040309
ORB040352
Elapsed time
This mode indicates the total time traveled since the last driving time reset.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the
driving time keeps going while the engine
is running.
The meter’s working range is from
00:00~99:59.
Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1
second, when the driving time is being
displayed, clears the driving time to zero
(00:00).
Outside thermometer (if equipped)
This mode indicates the outside temperature around the vehicle.
The meter's working range is from -40°C
to 80°C (-40°F to 176°F).
To change the outside temperature display unit (°C ↔ °F), press the TRIP button more than 1 second in this mode.
ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped)
• Automatic transaxle
You can turn the ECO indicator on/off on
the instrument cluster in this mode.
If you push the TRIP button more than 1
second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF
is displayed in the screen and the ECO
indicator turns off while driving.
If you want to display the ECO indicator
again, press the TRIP button more than 1
second in the ECO OFF mode and then
ECO ON mode is displayed in the
screen.
When you press the TRIP button less
than 1 second in the ECO mode, the
mode is changed to tripmeter.
4 52
Features of your vehicle
• Manual transaxle
You can turn the manual transaxle shift
indicator on/off on the instrument cluster
in this mode.
If you select the ECO OFF in the trip
computer, the manual transaxle shift
indicator will not illuminate.
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground or
the battery power has been interrupted, the “Distance to empty” function
may not operate correctly.
The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6
gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
• The fuel consumption (if equipped)
and distance to empty values may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
• The distance to empty value is an estimate of the available driving distance.
This value may differ from the actual
driving distance available.
■ Type A
■ Type B
ORBR042309
Icy road warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driver
the road may be icy when:
• Ignition ON
• Temperature range: approximately
below 4°C (39.2°F).
The warning light will blink for 10 seconds and then illuminate. Also, the warning chime will sound.
✽ NOTICE
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.
4 53
Features of your vehicle
Warnings and indicators
All warning lights are checked by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). Any light that does not illuminate
should be checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
After starting the engine, check to make
sure that all warning lights are off. If any
are still on, this indicates a situation that
needs attention. When releasing the
parking brake, the brake system warning
light should go off. The fuel warning light
will stay on if the fuel level is low.
4 54
ECO indicator
(if equipped)
(Automatic transaxle)
ECO
The ECO indicator is a system that
informs you to drive economically.
It is displayed if you drive fuel efficiently
to help you improve fuel efficiency.
• The ECO indicator (green) will turn on
when you are driving fuel efficiently in
the ECO ON mode.
If you don't want the indicator displayed, you can turn the ECO ON
mode to OFF mode by pressing the
TRIP button.
As per ECO ON/OFF Mode operation,
refer to the previous page.
• The fuel-efficiency can be changed by
the driver's driving habit and road condition.
• It doesn't work at the condition which
doesn't meet economical driving such
as P (Park), N (Neutral), R (Reverse)
or sports mode.
• While the instant fuel consumption
mode is displayed on the LCD screen,
the ECO indicator turns off.
WARNING
Don't keep watching the indicator
while driving. It will distract you
while driving and cause an accident that results in severe personal
injury.
Features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
(if equipped)
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
This light also comes on when the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) is
not working properly. If the SRS air bag
warning light
does not come on, or
continuously remains on after operating
for about 6 seconds when you turned the
ignition switch to the ON position or started the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, have the SRS inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
This light illuminates if the ignition switch
is turned ON and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.
If the ABS warning light remains on,
comes on while driving, or does not
come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position, this indicates
that there may be a malfunction with the
ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible. The normal braking
system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake
system.
Electronic brake
force distribution
(EBD) system
warning light
If two warning lights illuminate at the
same time while driving, your vehicle
may have a malfunction with the ABS
and EBD system.
In this case, your ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the both ABS and brake warning
lights are on and stay on, your vehicle’s brake system will not work
normally during sudden braking. In
this case, avoid high speed driving
and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
If the ABS warning light or EBD warning light is on and stays on, the
speedometer or odometer/tripmeter
may not work. In this case, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.
4 55
Features of your vehicle
Seat belt warning and
chime (if equipped)
Seat belt warning light
As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt
warning light will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds each time you
turn the ignition switch ON regardless of
belt fastening.
For details, refer to the seat belt on chapter 3.
Turn signal indicator
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated
by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on
but does not blink, blinks more rapidly
than normal, or does not illuminate at all,
a malfunction in the turn signal system is
indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs.
High beam indicator
This indicator illuminates when the headlights are on and in the high beam position or when the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Tail light indicator
This indicator illuminates when the tail
lights are on.
4 56
Engine oil pressure
warning light
This warning light indicates the engine oil
pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
stop.
2. With the engine off, check the engine
oil level. If the level is low, add oil as
required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure
warning light is illuminated, severe
damage could result.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
If the oil pressure warning light
stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may
result. The oil pressure warning
light comes on whenever there is
insufficient oil pressure. In normal
operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on,
then go out when the engine is
started. If the oil pressure warning
light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a serious malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn off
the engine and check the oil level. If
the oil level is low, fill the engine oil
to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately. In any
instance where the oil light stays on
when the engine is running, the
engine should be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer before
the car is driven again.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning light
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the START or ON position. The warning
light should go off when the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and add
fluid as required. Then check all brake
components for fluid leaks.
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks are
found, the warning light remains on or
the brakes do not operate properly.
Have the vehicle towed to any authorized HYUNDAI dealer for a brake system inspection and necessary repairs.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still
have braking on two wheels even if one
of the dual systems should fail. With only
one of the dual systems working, more
than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short
a distance with only a portion of the
brake system working. If the brakes fail
while you are driving, shift to a lower gear
for additional engine braking and stop the
car as soon as it is safe to do so.
4 57
Features of your vehicle
To check bulb operation, check whether
the parking brake and brake fluid warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warning
light on is dangerous. If the brake
warning light remains on, have the
brakes checked and repaired immediately by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Automatic transaxle shift
indicator (if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(if equipped)
The indicator displays to show the automatic transaxle shift lever selection.
This light comes on when the front fog
lights are ON.
Manual transaxle shift
indicator (if equipped)
Rear fog light indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator informs you which gear is
desired while driving to save fuel.
For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd
gear is desired (currently the shift
lever is in the 2nd gear).
: Indicates that shifting down to the
3rd gear is desired (currently the
shift lever is in the 4th gear).
This indicator illuminates when the rear
fog lights are ON.
✽ NOTICE
• When the system is not working properly, up & down arrow indicator and
Gear are not displayed.
• If you select the ECO OFF in the trip
computer, the manual transaxle shift
indicator will not illuminate.
4 58
Features of your vehicle
Charging system warning
light
Trunk lid/Tailgate open
warning light
This warning light indicates a malfunction
of either the generator or electrical
charging system.
If the warning light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the generator drive belt for looseness or breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a problem exists somewhere in the electrical
charging system. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer correct the problem
as soon as possible.
This warning light illuminates when a
trunk lid/tailgate is not closed securely
with the ignition in any position.
Door ajar warning light
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the ignition switch in any position.
Door open position indicator (if equipped)
This indicator illuminates when a door is
not closed securely.
The indicator displays which door is
opened.
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
Without smart key system
This light illuminates when the immobilizer key is inserted and turned to the ON
position to start the engine.
At this time, you can start the engine. The
light goes out after the engine is running.
If this light blinks when the ignition switch
is in the ON position before starting the
engine, have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
With smart key system (if equipped)
If any of the following occurs in a vehicle
equipped with the smart key, the immobilizer indicator illuminates, blinks or the
light goes off.
• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if
the engine start/stop button is turned
to the ACC or ON position, the indicator will illuminate. However, when the
smart key is not in the vehicle, if the
engine start/stop button is depressed,
the indicator will blink for a few minutes
to indicate that you will not be able to
start the engine.
4 59
Features of your vehicle
• When the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and the indicator turns
off after 2 seconds, the system may
have a problem. Have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
• When the battery is weak, if the engine
start/stop button is depressed, the indicator will blink and you will not be able
to start the engine. However, you may
still be able to start the engine by
pressing the engine start/stop button
with the smart key. If smart key system
related parts have a problem, the indicator blinks.
4 60
Low fuel level warning light
Malfunction indicator light
(MIL) (check engine light)
This warning light indicates the fuel tank
is nearly empty. When it comes on, you
should add fuel as soon as possible.
Driving with the fuel level warning light on
or with the fuel level below “E” can cause
the engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.
This indicator light is part of the Engine
Control System which monitors various
emission control system components. If
this light illuminates while driving, it indicates that a potential malfunction has
been detected somewhere in the emission control system.
This light will also illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will go out in a few seconds
after the engine is started. If it illuminates
while driving, or does not illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.
Generally, your vehicle will continue to be
drivable, but have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer promptly.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
Prolonged
driving
with
the
Emission
Control
System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminated may cause damage to the
emission control systems which
could effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION - Gasoline engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light illuminates, potential catalytic converter
damage is possible which could
result in loss of engine power. Have
the Engine Control System inspected as soon as possible by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
(if equipped with DPF)
When the malfunction indicator
light is blinks, it may stop blinking
after driving the vehicle at more
than 60km/h (37 mph) or at more
than second gear with 1500 ~ 2000
engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
If the malfunction indicator light
continues to be blinked in spite of
the procedure, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
then check the DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the
malfunction indicator light blinking
for a long time, the DPF system can
be damaged and fuel consumption
can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel engine
If the Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light blinks,
some error related to the injection
quantity adjustment occurs which
could result in loss of engine
power, combustion noise and poor
emission. Have the Engine Control
System inspected as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 61
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant temperature warning light
(if equipped)
ESP indicator (Electronic
Stability Program)
(if equipped)
ESP OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The warning light illuminates if the temperature of the engine coolant is above
125±2.5°C (257±4.5°F).
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. If your vehicle overheats, refer
to “Overheating” in section 6.
The ESP indicator will illuminate when
the ignition switch is turned ON, but
should go off after approximately 3 seconds. When the ESP is on, it monitors the
driving conditions. Under normal driving
conditions, the ESP indicator will remain
off. When a slippery or low traction condition is encountered, the ESP will operate, and the ESP indicator will blink to
indicate the ESP is operating.
But, if the ESP system malfunctions the
indicator illuminates and stays on. Take
your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system checked.
The ESP OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned ON,
but should go off after approximately 3
seconds. To switch to ESP OFF mode,
press the ESP OFF button. The ESP
OFF indicator will illuminate indicating
the ESP is deactivated.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine coolant temperature warning light illuminates, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
4 62
Features of your vehicle
Glow indicator (Diesel
engine)
Fuel filter warning light
(Diesel engine)
Electric power steering
(EPS) system warning light
The indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed at the ON position. The engine can be started after the
preheat indicator light goes off. The illuminating time varies with the water temperature, air temperature and battery
condition.
This warning light illuminates for 3 seconds after the ignition switch is set to the
ON position and then it will go out. If it
lights up while the engine is running, it
indicates that water has accumulated
inside the fuel filter. If this happens,
remove the water from the fuel filter. For
more Information, refer to “Fuel filter” in
section 7.
This indicator light comes on after the
ignition key is turned to the ON position
and then it will go out.
This light also comes on when the EPS
has some troubles. If it comes on while
driving, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine was not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
CAUTION
If the preheat indicator light continues to illuminate or flash on and off
after the engine has warmed up or
while driving, check the system by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
EPS
CAUTION
When the fuel filter warning light is
illuminated, engine power (vehicle
speed & idle speed) may decrease.
If you keep driving with the warning
light on, you can damage your vehicle's engine parts and injection system of the Common Rail. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.
4 63
Features of your vehicle
Overspeed warning
(if equipped)
120
km/h
Overspeed warning light
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning light will
blink. This is to prevent you from driving
your vehicle with overspeed.
Overspeed warning chime (if equipped)
If you drive with the speed of 120 km/h or
more, the overspeed warning chime will
sound for about 5 seconds. This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with
overspeed.
4 64
Warning on the LCD screen
(if equipped)
Key is not in vehicle
If the smart key is
not in the vehicle
and if any door is
opened or closed
with the ignition
switch in ACC, ON,
or START, the
warning illuminates on the LCD screen.
The chime also sounds for 5 seconds
when there smart key is not in the vehicle and any door is closed.
Turn the ignition switch off or get hold of
the smart key.
Key is not detected
If the smart key is
not in the vehicle
or is not detected
and you push the
engine start/stop
button, the warning illuminates on
the LCD screen for 10 seconds.
Features of your vehicle
Low key battery
When the smart
key in the vehicle
discharges,
the
warning
illuminates on the LCD
screen for 10 seconds.
Replace the battery with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
with the smart key.
Press brake pedal to start engine
(Automatic transaxle)
If
the
ignition
switch turn to the
ACC position twice
by pushing the
engine start/stop
button repeatedly
without pressing
the brake pedal, the warning illuminates
on the LCD screen for 10 seconds to
indicate that you should press the brake
pedal to start the engine.
Press clutch pedal to start engine
(Manual transaxle)
If
the
ignition
switch turn to the
ACC position twice
by pushing the
engine start/stop
button repeatedly
without pressing
the clutch pedal, the warning illuminates
on the LCD screen for 10 seconds to
indicate that you should press the clutch
pedal to start the engine.
4 65
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" position
If you push the
engine start/stop
button with the
ignition switch ON
and the shift lever
not in P (Park), the
warning
illuminates on the LCD screen for 10 seconds
to indicate that you should press the
start/stop button with the shift lever in
P(Park) to turn off the engine.
4 66
Press start button with smart key
If you push the
engine start/ stop
button while the
"Key is not detected" illuminates on
the LCD screen,
the warning illuminates for 10 seconds.
Press start button again
If there is a problem
with
the
engine start/stop
button system, the
warning
illuminates for 10 seconds to indicate
that you could start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button while
pressing the brake pedal.
If the warning illuminates each time you
push the start/stop button, take your
vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.
Features of your vehicle
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
If you try to start
the engine with the
shift lever not in P
(Park)
or
N
(Neutral),
the
warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD screen.
You can also start the engine with the
shift lever in N (Neutral), but for your
safety start the engine with the shift lever
in P (Park).
Press start button while turn steering
When the steering
wheel does not
unlock, the warning illuminates for
10 seconds on the
LCD screen.
Check steering wheel lock
When the steering
wheel does not
lock, the warning
illuminates for 10
seconds on the
LCD screen.
4 67
Features of your vehicle
Steering wheel unlocked
When the steering
wheel does not
lock, the warning
illuminates for 10
seconds on the
LCD screen.
4 68
Check stop lamp fuse
When the stop
lamp fuse is disconnected,
the
warning
illuminates for 10 seconds on the LCD
display.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If that
is not possible you can start the engine
by pressing the engine start/stop button
for 10 seconds in ACC.
Features of your vehicle
REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the back sensors are limited. Whenever backing-up, pay as much
attention to what is behind you as you
would in a vehicle without a rear parking
assist system.
4 Door
WARNING
Sensors
ORB040098
5 Door
Sensors
ORB042098R
The rear parking assist system is a
supplementary function only. The
operation of the rear parking assist
system can be affected by several
factors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsibility
of the driver to always check the
area behind the vehicle before and
while backing up.
Operation of the rear parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system will activate when backing
up with the ignition switch ON.
• The sensing distance while the rear
parking assist system is in operation is
approximately 120 cm (47 in.).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest
one will be recognized first.
Types of warning sound
• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47
in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps intermittently.
• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31
in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:
Buzzer beeps more frequently.
• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)
of the rear bumper:
Buzzer sounds continuously.
The rear parking assist system assists
the driver during backward movement of
the vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within a distance of 120 cm (47
in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a
supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it replace the need for
extreme care and attention of the driver.
4 69
Features of your vehicle
Type of the warning indicator
(if equipped)
Distance from
object
Non-operational conditions of
rear parking assist system
Warning indicator
Less than 40 cm
(15 in.)
*1
41cm ~80 cm
(16 in. ~ 31 in.)
*1
81cm ~ 120 cm
(32 in. ~ 47 in.)
*1
*1: It indicates the range of sensing
object by each sensor. (Left, Center,
Right)
❈: In case of that the object is between
sensors or close, indicator could be
different.
4 70
The rear parking assist system may
not operate properly when:
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will
operate normally when the moisture
has been cleared.)
2. The sensor is covered with foreign
matter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will operate
normally when the material is removed
or the sensor is no longer blocked.)
3. Driving on uneven road surfaces
(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradient).
4. Objects generating excessive noise
(vehicle horns, loud motorcycle
engines, or truck air brakes) are within
range of the sensor.
5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.
6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones
are within range of the sensor.
7. The sensor is covered with snow.
8. Trailer towing
The detecting range may decrease
when:
1. The sensor is stained with foreign matter such as snow or water. (The sensing range will return to normal when
removed.)
2. Outside air temperature is extremely
hot or cold.
The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor:
1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,
chains or small poles.
2. Objects which tend to absorb the sensor frequency such as clothes, spongy
material or snow.
3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m
(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14
cm (6 in.) in diameter.
Features of your vehicle
Rear parking assist system precautions
• The rear parking assist system may
not sound sequentially depending on
the speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has been
modified or damaged. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize objects
less than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sensor, or it may sense an incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is frozen or stained
with snow, dirt, or water, the sensor
may be inoperative until the stains are
removed using a soft cloth.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽ NOTICE
Self-diagnosis
This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors;
It can not detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed. Also,
small or slim objects, such as poles or
objects located between sensors may not
be detected by the sensors.
Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up.
Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the
system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations.
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds intermittently when shifting the gear to the R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a
malfunction in the rear parking assist system. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the
road, particularly pedestrians, and
especially children. Be aware that
some objects may not be detected
by the sensors, due to the object’s
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of
the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions
before moving the vehicle in any
direction.
WARNING
Your new vehicle warranty does not
cover any accidents or damage to
the vehicle or injuries to its occupants due to a rear parking assist
system malfunction. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
4 71
Features of your vehicle
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
The rearview camera may be turned off
by pressing the ON/OFF button when the
rearview camera is activated.
To turn the camera on again, press the
ON/OFF button again when the ignition
switch is on and the shift lever in R
(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn on
automatically whenever the ignition
switch is turned off and on again.
ORB040330
Rear view display
WARNING
• This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check
the inside/outside rearview mirror
and the area behind the vehicle
before and while backing up
because there is a dead zone that
can't see through the camera.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not
operate normally.
✽ NOTICE
ORB040359
The rearview camera will activate when
the back-up light is ON with the ignition
switch ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the rearview display while backing-up.
4 72
The rearview camera may not operate
normally, when you drive in the
extremely high or low temperature
area.
(operating temperature: -20°C~65°C
(-4°F ~ 149°F))
Features of your vehicle
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
ORB040045
The hazard warning flasher should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location.
When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far
as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on
by pushing in the hazard switch. This
causes all turn signal lights to blink. The
hazard warning lights will operate even
though the key is not in the ignition
switch.
To turn the hazard warning lights off,
push the switch a second time.
4 73
Features of your vehicle
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
(if equipped)
Headlight escort function
(if equipped)
Headlight welcome function
(if equipped)
• The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when the
driver removes the ignition key (smart
key: turns off the engine) and opens
the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights will
be turned off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
(smart key: turns off the engine) perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC
or OFF position with the headlights ON,
the headlights (and/or tail lights) remain
on for about 5 minutes. However, if the
driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the transmitter (or smart key) twice or turning the
light switch to the OFF or Auto position.
However, if you turn the light switch to the
Auto position when it is dark outside, the
headlights will not be turned off.
When the headlight switch is in the ON or
AUTO position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, if you press
the door unlock button on the transmitter
(or smart key), the headlights will come
on for about 15 seconds.
If the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the function can only operate at
night.
At this time, if you press the door unlock
button again or door lock button on the
transmitter (or smart key), the headlights
will turn off immediately.
4 74
CAUTION
If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver's door and front passenger’s
door), the battery saver function
does not operate and the headlight
escort function does not turn off
automatically. Therefore, it causes
the battery to be discharged. In this
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type A
OTA040050E
■ Type B
■ Type A
ORBC040047
■ Type B
OTA040050L
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a
Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at the
end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
ORBC040048
■ Type B
ORB040047E
ORB040048E
Parking light position (
)
When the light switch is in the parking
light position, the tail, license and instrument panel lights are ON and the tail light
indicator is ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the headlight
position the head, tail, position, license
and instrument panel lights are ON.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the instrument panel
lights.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlights.
4 75
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
CAUTION
ORBR043360
■ Type B
• Never place anything over sensor
(1) located on the instrument
panel. This will ensure better
auto-light system control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner. The cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work properly.
■ Type A
ORBC040049
■ Type B
ORB040049E
High beam operation
ORBR043359
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light
position, the taillights and headlights will
turn ON or OFF automatically depending
on the amount of light outside the vehicle.
4 76
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it back
for low beams.
The high beam indicator will light when
the headlight high beams are switched
on.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a
prolonged time while the engine is not
running.
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
■ Type A
■ Type A
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles. Using high
beam could obstruct the other driver's vision.
ORBC040050
■ Type B
ORBC040051
■ Type B
ORB040050E
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the normal
(low beam) position when released. The
headlight switch does not need to be on
to use this flashing feature.
ORB040051E
Turn signals and lane change signals
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on the
turn signals, move the lever up or down
(A). Green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is
operating. They will self-cancel after a
turn is completed.
4 77
Features of your vehicle
If the indicator continues to flash after a
turn, manually return the lever to the OFF
position.
To signal a lane change, move the turn
signal lever slightly and hold it in position
(B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out and
will require replacement.
■ Type A
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type D
One-touch lane change function
(if equipped)
To activate an one-touch lane change
function, move the turn signal lever
slightly and then release it. The lane
change signals will blink 3 times.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally quick
or slow, a bulb may be burned out or
have a poor electrical connection in the
circuit.
ORB040052/ORB040052D/ORB040052E/ORB040052L
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide improved visibility and avoid accidents when visibility is poor due to fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights will turn on when fog light
switch (1) is turned to ON after the parking light is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the switch to OFF.
4 78
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
■ Type A
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type D
When in operation, the fog lights
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lights when visibility is poor or
unnecessary battery and generator
drain could occur.
✽ NOTICE
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the front fog light.
ORBC040053/ORBC040052E/ORB040053E/ORB040053L
Rear fog light (if equipped)
To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the headlight on position
and turn the rear fog light switch (1) to the on position.
The rear fog lights turn on when the rear fog light switch is turned on after the front
fog light switch is turned on and the headlight switch is in the parklight position.
To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the front fog light switch to the on position again
or turn the headlight switch off.
4 79
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Left-hand drive type
To turn on the rear fog light switch, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position.
ORB040333
Right-hand drive type
Loading condition
Driver only
Driver + Front passenger
Full passengers
ORB042333R
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Manual type
To adjust the headlight beam level
according to the number of passengers
and loading weight in the luggage area,
turn the beam leveling switch.
4 80
The higher the number of the switch
position, the lower the headlight beam
level. Always keep the headlight beam at
the proper leveling position, or headlights
may dazzle other road users.
Listed below are the examples of proper
switch settings. For loading conditions
other than those listed below, adjust the
switch position so that the beam level
may be the nearest as the condition
obtained according to the list.
Switch position
0
0
1
Full passengers +
Maximum permissible
loading
3
Driver + Maximum permissible loading
5
Features of your vehicle
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield wiper/washer
Rear window wiper/washer (if equipped)
■ Type A
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type D
■ Type A
■ Type B
OTA040054/ORB041406
D : Rear wiper/washer control (if equipped)
·
– Wash with brief wipes
· ON ( ) – Continuous wipe
· OFF (O) – Off
ORBC040054E/ORB040054E/OTA040053/ORB041405
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST (
) – Single wipe
· OFF (O) – Off
· INT (---) – Intermittent wipe (if equipped)
· LO (1) – Low wiper speed
· HI (2) – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment (if equipped)
C : Wash with brief wipes (front) (if equipped)
4 81
Features of your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON.
MIST (
) : For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward
and release it with the lever in the OFF position.
The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
OFF (O) : Wiper is not in operation
INT (---)* : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping
intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary
the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.
LO (1) : Normal wiper speed
HI (2) : Fast wiper speed
■ Type A
■ Type C
■ Type B
■ Type D
*: if equipped
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the
snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers
to ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the
wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.
4 82
ORBC040056E/ORB040056E/OTA040056/ORB041408
Windshield washers
In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the windshield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release
the lever.
If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the
fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate nonabrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine
compartment on the passenger side.
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to the
washer pump, do not operate the
washer when the fluid reservoir is
empty.
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freezing
temperatures without first warming
the windshield with the defrosters;
the washer solution could freeze on
contact with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids in
the winter season or cold weather.
■ Type A
OTA040057
■ Type B
ORB041409
Rear window wiper and washer
switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the wiper
and washer switch lever. Turn the switch
to desired position to operate the rear
wiper and washer.
- Spraying washer fluid and wiping
ON (
) - Normal wiper operation
OFF (O) - Wiper is not in operation
4 83
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR LIGHT
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
WARNING
Do not use the interior lights when
driving in the dark. Accidents could
happen because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn off
approximately 20 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off.
4 84
ORB040057
Map lamp
• Push the lens to turn the map lamp on
or off. This light produces a spot beam
for convenient use as a map lamp at
night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.
• ON : The map lamp stay on at all times.
• DOOR : In the DOOR position, the
map lamp come on when any
door is opened regardless of
the ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked by
the transmitter (or smart key),
the map lamp come on for
approximately 30 seconds as
long as any door is not open.
The map lamp goes out gradually after approximately 30
seconds if the door is closed.
However, if the ignition switch
is ON or all doors are locked,
the map lamp will turn off
immediately. If a door is
opened with the ignition switch
in the ACC or LOCK position,
the map lamp stays on for
about 20 minutes. However, if
a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position,
the map lamp stays on continuously.
• OFF : The lights turn off even if a door
is opened.
❈ When the lamp is turned ON
by pressing the lens (1), the
lamp does not turn off even if
the switch (2) is in the OFF
position.
Features of your vehicle
ORB040361
Room lamp
• ON (1):
In the ON position, the light stays on at all
times.
• DOOR (2) :
In the DOOR position, the light comes on
when any door is opened regardless of
the ignition switch position.
When doors are unlocked by the transmitter (or smart key), the light comes on
for approximately 30 seconds as long as
any door is not open. The light goes out
gradually after approximately 30 seconds
if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked,
the light will turn off immediately.
If a door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the
light stays on for about 20 minutes.
However, if a door is opened with the
ignition switch in the ON position, the
light stays on continuously.
4 Door
ORBC040059
5 Door
• OFF (3) :
In the OFF position, the light stays off at
all times even when a door is open.
ORB041402
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when
the trunk lid/tailgate is opened.
4 85
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
The luggage room lamp comes on
as long as the trunk lid/tailgate
opens. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, close the
trunk lid/tailgate securely after
using the luggage room.
4 86
Features of your vehicle
DEFROSTER
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will
operate at the same time you turn on the
rear window defroster.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of
the rear window, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean the
window.
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to “Windshield
defrosting and defogging” in this section.
ORB040063
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from the
rear window, while the engine is running.
To activate the rear window defroster,
press the rear window defroster button
located in the center facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of snow on
the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 20 minutes
or when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
4 87
Features of your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection knob
4. Air intake control button
5. Air conditioning button
6. Rear window defrost button
ORB040065
4 88
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
ORB040066L
4 89
Features of your vehicle
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, D, E, C)
ORB040067
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Five, Face, BiLevel, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost
air position.
4 90
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Features of your vehicle
ORB040356
ORB040068
ORB040069
MAX A/C-Level (B, D, E)
To select the MAX A/C, turn the temperature knob to the extreme the left.
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and the
recirculated air position will be selected
automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you
to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To
change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to
the right position for warm and hot air or
left position for cooler air.
4 91
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated
air position selected,
air from the passenger compartment will
be drawn through the
heating system and
heated or cooled
according to the function selected.
ORB040070
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select
the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
press the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside
(fresh) air position
selected, air enters
the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to
the function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of
the windshield and side windows and the
air within the passenger compartment
may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.
4 92
WARNING
• Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driving.
Features of your vehicle
ORB040073
ORB043099E
ORB040354
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows you to
control the fan speed of the air flowing
from the ventilation system. To change
the fan speed, turn the knob to the right
for higher speed or left for lower speed.
Setting the fan speed control knob to the
“0” position turns off the fan.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
speed control knob to the "0" position.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will
illuminate). Press the button again to turn
the air conditioning system off.
4 93
Features of your vehicle
System operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the
position.
2. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the mode
or
position.
to the
4 94
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position. Be sure to return the control
to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driver
alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be
taken that these are not blocked by
leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air position and fan speed to the
desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning
HYUNDAI Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine. Press the air conditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the
position.
3. Set the air intake control to the outside
air or recirculated air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum
comfort.
• When maximum cooling is desired, set
the temperature control to the extreme
left position (the MAX A/C position),
then set the fan speed control to the
highest speed.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge
closely while driving up hills or in
heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower
fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.
• When opening the windows in humid
weather air conditioning may create
water droplets inside the vehicle.
Since excessive water droplets may
cause damage to electrical equipment,
air conditioning should only be used
with the windows closed.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows for a short time to let the hot
air inside the vehicle escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of the
windows on rainy or humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning
system.
• During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a
slight change in engine speed as the
air conditioning compressor cycles.
This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system every
month only for a few minutes to ensure
maximum system performance.
• When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground
under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation
characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning system
in the recirculated air position provides
maximum cooling, however, continual
operation in this mode may cause the
air inside the vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and humid air
intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of
the windshield could cause the outer
surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this case,
set the mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan speed control to the lower speed.
4 95
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Blower Evaporator core
Climate control air filter
Heater core
OHM048209
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating
and air conditioning system. If dust or
other pollutants accumulate in the filter
over a period of time, the air flow from the
air vents may decrease, resulting in
moisture accumulation on the inside of
the windshield even when the outside
(fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
4 96
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty or rough
roads, more frequent air conditioner
filter inspections and changes are
required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is low,
the performance of the air conditioning is
reduced. Overfilling also has a negative
impact on the air conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
✽ NOTICE
It is important that the correct type and
amount of oil and refrigerant is used.
Otherwise, damage to the compressor
and abnormal system operation may
occur.
WARNING
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. Improper service
may cause serious injury to the
person performing the service.
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. AUTO (automatic control) button
2. OFF button
3. Temperature control knob
4. A/C display
5. Air intake control button
6. Fan speed control knob
7. Air conditioning button
8. Mode selection button
ORB040340
4 97
Features of your vehicle
ORB040342
Automatic heating and air conditioning
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake and
air-conditioning will be controlled automatically according to the temperature
setting.
4 98
ORB040341
2. Turn the temperature control knob to
set the desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defrost button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 23°C (73°F).
ORB040353
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sensor
located on the instrument panel to
ensure better control of the heating and
cooling system.
Features of your vehicle
Manual heating and air conditioning
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually by pushing buttons
other than the AUTO button. In this case,
the system works sequentially according
to the order of buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be
controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the
air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
Floor & Defrost
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor
and the windshield with a small amount
directed to the side window defrosters.
Face-Level
ORB040347
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the
direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted as
follows:
Air flow is directed toward the upper body
and face. Additionally, each outlet can be
controlled to direct the air discharged
from the outlet.
Bi-Level
Air flow is directed towards the face and
the floor.
Refer to the illustration in the “Manual climate control system”.
Floor-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air being
directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
4 99
Features of your vehicle
ORB040355
ORB040068
ORB040341
Defrost-Level
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
separately using the horizontal thumbwheel. To close the vent, rotate it left to
the maximum position. To open the vent,
rotate it right to the desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of air
delivery from these vents using the vent
control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum by turning the knob to the right
extremely.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum by turning the knob to the left
extremely.
When turning the knob, the temperature
will increase or decrease by 0.5°C (1°F).
When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.
4 100
Features of your vehicle
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compartment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
ORB040345
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control position,
push the control button.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position
selected,
air
enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in the
recirculated air position (without air
conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows
and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated air
position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.
4 101
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle which
may fog the glass and obscure
visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with the
air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious
harm or death due to a drop in the
oxygen level and/or body temperature.
• Continued climate control system
operation in the recirculated air
position can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehicle
control. Set the air intake control
to the outside (fresh) air position
as much as possible while driving.
4 102
ORB040344
ORB040346
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by turning the fan speed control
knob.
The higher the fan speed is, the more air
is delivered.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.
Air conditioning
Push the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate).
Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.
Features of your vehicle
ORB040343
OFF mode
Push the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However, you can
still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
4 103
Features of your vehicle
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING - Windshield
heating
Do not use the
or
position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection knob
or button to the
position and
fan speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
4 104
• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired while
defrosting or defogging, set the mode
to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and ice
from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the hood
and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve
heater and defroster efficiency and to
reduce the probability of fogging up the
inside of the windshield.
ORB040075
Manual climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected
automatically. If the
position is
selected, air conditioning will also be
selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and/or outside
(fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button
manually.
Features of your vehicle
ORB040076
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.
ORB040348
Automatic climate control system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the desired position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)
air position are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the
position is selected,
lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher
fan speed.
ORB040349
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot
(HI) position.
3. Press the defrost button (
).
4. The air conditioning will be turned on
according to the detected ambient
temperature and outside (fresh) air
position will be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower fan
speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
4 105
Features of your vehicle
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging up
the inside of the windshield, the air intake
or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions
such as
or
position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the following.
ORB040077L
Manual climate control system
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defrost button (
).
3. Press the air intake control button at
least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 second of interval.
It indicates that the defogging logic is
canceled or returned to the programmed
status.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the defrost button (
).
3. While holding the air conditioning
(A/C) button pressed, press the air
intake control button (recirculated air
position) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5
second of interval. It indicates that the
defogging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
4 106
ORB040350
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic
status.
Features of your vehicle
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the driver
or passengers.
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to place
so many items in the storage
compartment that the storage
compartment cover cannot close
securely.
ORB040351
Center console storage
(if equipped)
To open the center console storage pull
up the lever.
ORB040362
Sliding armrest
To move forward
Grab the front portion of the armrest (1)
then pull it forward.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire
and/or explode if the vehicle is
exposed to hot temperatures for
extended periods.
To move rearward
Push the armrest rearward with your
palm.
CAUTION
Do not grap the front portion of the
armrest (1) when moving the armrest rearward. Your finger may be
caught in the armrest.
4 107
Features of your vehicle
WARNING
ORB040080
ORB040081
Glove box
Sunglass holder
To open the glove box, push the button
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.
To open the sunglass holder, press the
cover and the holder will slowly open.
Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.
Push to close.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
CAUTION
Do not keep food in the glove box
for a long time.
4 108
• Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown
from the holder in the event of a
sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass holder
while the vehicle is moving. The
rear view mirror of the vehicle
can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses forcibly
into a sunglass holder to prevent
breakage or deformation of
glasses. It may cause personal
injury if you try to open it forcibly
when the glasses are jammed in
holder.
Features of your vehicle
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING
• Do not hold the lighter in after it
is already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
CAUTION
ORB040083L
Cigarette lighter (if equipped)
For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC position
or the ON position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element
has heated, the lighter will pop out to the
“ready” position.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine HYUNDAI
replacement or its approved equivalent.
Only a genuine HYUNDAI lighter
should be used in the cigarette
lighter socket. The use of plug-in
accessories (shavers, hand-held
vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may
damage the socket or cause electrical failure.
ORB040082
Ashtray (if equipped)
To use the ashtray, open the cover.
To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out.
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ashtrays
as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or matches
in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a
fire.
4 109
Features of your vehicle
Cup holder
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion. If the hot
liquid spills, you could be burned.
Such a burn to the driver could
lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden stop
or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
ORB040078
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
CAUTION
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of direct
sun light and do not put them in a
vehicle that is heated up. It may
explode.
Do not place uncovered cups in the
cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion. If the liquid spills, electric
systems may malfunction.
ORBR040085
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull
it downward, unsnap it from the bracket
(1) and swing it to the side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
The ticket holder (4) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)
WARNING
For your safety, do not obstruct your
vision when using the sunvisor.
4 110
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION
ORB040084L
Power outlet
The power outlet is designed to provide
power for mobile telephones or other
devices designed to operate with vehicle
electrical systems. The devices should
draw less than 10 amps with the engine
running.
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and remove
the accessory plug after use.
Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the
engine off could cause the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories
which are less than 10A in electric capacity. If not, it could lead
to an overheated power outlet or
electric wiring in the vehicle and
electric systems may malfunction.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static and
malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices used in your
vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Make sure that the electric
devices are plugged in securely. If
not, it could cause a malfunction
of electric systems.
• If you use an electric device with
a battery, electric current may
flow from the electric device into
the vehicle and may cause a malfunction of electric systems. Only
use electric devices which could
prevent inverse current.
WARNING
Do not put a finger or a foreign element (pin, etc.) into a power outlet
and do not touch with a wet hand.
You may get an electric shock.
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Setup the clock
With audio off
1. Press the [SETUP] button until the
clock of the display blinks.
2. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
ORB040086
Digital clock (if equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while driving. You may lose your steering
control and cause severe personal
injury or accidents.
Whenever the battery terminals or related fuses are disconnected, you must
reset the time.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the clock buttons operate as
follows:
4 112
With audio on
1. Press the [SETUP] button.
2. Select the [CLOCK] mode by turning
the knob(1) and press it.
3. Set the clock by turning the knob(1)
and press it.
OUN026348
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the upper
portion of hanger.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
Features of your vehicle
■ Type A
■ Type B
WARNING
OEL049222
Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)
When using a floor mat on the front floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor
mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps
the floor mat from sliding forward.
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat to
the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to the
vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat
should be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT – Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are designed
to securely hold the floor mat in
place. To avoid any interference
with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends that only the HYUNDAI
floor mat designed for use in your
vehicle be installed.
ORB041403
Cargo area cover (if equipped)
Use the cover to hide items stored in the
cargo area.
The cargo area cover will be lifted when
the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the
strap (1) from holder if you want to return
the cover to original position. To remove
the cargo area cover completely, lift the
cover to a 50-degree angle and pull it out
to the full (2). For installation of the cover,
reverse the removal procedure.
4 113
Features of your vehicle
EXTERIOR FEATURES
CAUTION
• When you return the cargo area
cover to its original position, hold
the cover and lower it.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the
cover removed. It may damage to
the cover.
• The cargo area cover may be lifted
when the tailgate is opened.
Ensure that the luggage on the
cover is moved to a safe place.
• Since the cargo area cover may be
damaged or malformed, do not
apply excessive force to the cover
or do not put the heavy loads on it.
WARNING
• Do not place objects on the cargo
area cover while driving. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly
injure vehicle occupants during
an accident or when braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the
luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as far
forward as possible.
4 114
ORB040087L
OED046090
Aux, USB and iPod port
(if equipped)
Mounting bracket for roof carrier
(if equipped)
If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB
(universal serial bus) port or iPod® port,
you can use an aux port to connect audio
devices a USB port to plug in a USB, and
an iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.
To install or remove a roof carrier, you
can use the mounting bracket and cover
on the roof.
When you install a roof carrier, use the
following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool(coin or flat blade driver) into the slot and slide the cover
toward the arrow on the cover.
®
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
WARNING
Use a coin or flat blade driver when
you remove the roof carrier cover.
If you use your fingernail, it may
damage your fingernail.
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,
be sure not to position cargo onto the
roof in such a way that it could interfere
with sunroof operation.
CAUTION
OED046091
2. Rotate the cover half way and insert
the cover on the roof hole as the illustration.
✽ NOTICE
To prevent loosing the roof carrier
cover, install the cover on the roof before
you install the roof carrier.
3. After using the roof carrier, install the
cover back on the roof in the reverse
order.
• When carrying cargo on the roof,
take the necessary precautions to
make sure the cargo does not
damage the roof of the vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof, make sure they do not
exceed the overall roof length or
width.
WARNING
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are loaded
onto the roof. Avoid sudden
starts, braking, sharp turns,
abrupt maneuvers or high speeds
that may result in loss of vehicle
control or rollover resulting in an
accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn corners carefully when carrying
items on the roof. Severe wind
updrafts, caused by passing
vehicles or natural causes, can
cause sudden upward pressure
on items loaded on the roof. This
is especially true when carrying
large, flat items such as wood
panels or mattresses. This could
cause the items to fall off the roof
and cause damage to your vehicle or others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to
make sure the items on the roof
are securely fastened.
4 115
Features of your vehicle
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE
■ Type A
CAUTION
• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and
electronic device may malfunction.
• Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner,
and air freshener from contacting the
interior parts because they may cause
damage or discoloration.
ORB040088
■ Type B
ORBC040088
Antenna
Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals. This
antenna is a removable type. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise. To
install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
4 116
• Before entering a place with a low
height clearance or a car wash,
remove surely the antenna by
rotating it counter-clockwise. If
not, the antenna may be damaged.
• When reinstalling your antenna, it
is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright
position to ensure proper reception. But it could be folded or
removed when parking the vehicle or when loading cargo on the
roof rack.
• When cargo is loaded on the roof
rack, do not place the cargo near
the antenna pole to ensure proper
reception.
Features of your vehicle
VOLUME (VOL +/-) (1)
• Press the up button (+) to increase volume.
• Press the down button (-) to decrease
volume.
MUTE (2)
• Press the MUTE button to cancel the
sound.
• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.
ORB040089
Steering wheel audio control
(if equipped)
The steering wheel audio control button
is installed to promote safe driving.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for less than 0.8 second, it will work as
follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select Radio,
CD (Compact Disc).
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
SEEK/PRESET (
/
) (4)
If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed
for 0.8 second or more, it will work as follows in each mode.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button. It will SEEK until you release the
button.
Detailed information for audio control
buttons is included in the following pages
in this section.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
4 117
Features of your vehicle
FM reception
AM(MW, LW) reception
JBM001
How car audio works
AM (MW, LW) and FM radio signals are
broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This
signal is then received by the radio and
sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in
some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of
other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
4 118
FM radio station
JBM002
JBM003
AM (MW, LW) broadcasts can be
received at greater distances than FM
broadcasts. This is because AM(MW,
LW) radio waves are transmitted at low
frequencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature of
the earth rather than travelling straight
out into the atmosphere. In addition, they
curve around obstructions so that they
can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high
frequencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM
broadcasts generally begin to fade at
short distances from the station. Also,
FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions.
These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not
indicate radio trouble:
Features of your vehicle
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean
that something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible
from the audio equipment.
CAUTION
JBM004
JBM005
• Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the
signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level
may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may
begin to play. This is because your
radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition has
passed.
When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio
set inside the vehicle, a separate
external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set
is used with an internal antenna
alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
Don't use a cellular phone when
you are driving. You should stop at
a safe place to use a cellular phone.
4 119
Features of your vehicle
Care of discs
• If the temperature inside the car is too
high, open the car windows for ventilation before using your car audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMA
files without permission. Use CDs that
are created only by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such as
benzene and thinner, normal cleaners
and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged. Hold and carry CDs by
the edges or the edges of the center
hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece of
soft cloth before playback (wipe it from
the center to the outside edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or paper
onto it.
• Make sure nothing other than CDs are
inserted into the CD player (Do not
insert more than one CD at a time).
4 120
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-R/CDRW CDs, certain CDs may not operate
normally depending upon manufacturing companies or processes and
recording methods. In such circumstances, if you still continue to use
those CDs, they may cause the malfunction of your car audio system.
✽ NOTICE - Playing an
Incompatible Copy
Protected Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do not
comply with the international audio CD
standards (Red Book), may not play on
your car audio. Please note that if you
try to play copy protected CDs and the
CD player does not perform correctly
the CDs maybe defective, not the CD
player.
Features of your vehicle
■ CD Player : PA710RBG
❋There will be no
logo if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
RB_PA710RBG_RADIO
4 121
Features of your vehicle
3. SEEK Button
PA710RBG_RADIO
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
1.
FM
Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1and
FM2 when the button is pressed each
time.
2.
AM
Button
Pressing the AM button selects the
AM band. AM Mode is displayed on the
LCD.
4 122
SEEK
• When the TRACK
button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency to
automatically select channel. Stops at
the previous frequency if no channel is
found.
SEEK
• When the TRACK
button is pressed,
it reduces the band frequency to automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is
found.
5. PRESET Buttons
1
• Press
~ 6
buttons less
than 0.8 seconds to play the station
saved in each button.
1
• Press
~ 6
button more
than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the
current station to the respective button
with a beep.
4. POWER Button & VOLUME
Knob
Turns on/off the set when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button
is turned to the right, it increases the volume and left,decreases the volume.
• Adjusts the volume of the car audio
system. Rotate clockwise to increase
the volume or counterclockwise to
decrease.
PA710RBG_RADIO
6. SCAN Button
• When the button is pressed, it automatically scans the radio stations
upwards.
• The SCAN feature steps through each
station, starting from the initial station,
for 5 seconds.
• Press the SCAN button again to stop
the scan feature and to listen to the
currently selected channel.
Features of your vehicle
7.
AST
9. SETUP
Button
When the button is pressed, it automatically selects and saves channels with
high reception rate to PRESET buttons
1
~ 6
and plays the channel
saved in PRESET1. If no channel is
saved after AST, it will play the previous
channel.
• Saves only to the Preset memory
1
~ 6
of FMA or AMA mode
in some models.
Button
Press this button to turn to the SETUP
adjustment mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the
play mode. (After entering SETUP mode,
move between items using the left, right
and PUSH functions of the TUNE
knob.)
The setup changes in the order of Scroll
➟ SDVC ➟ Media ➟
➟ Clock ➟
P.Bass...
■ Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree (Option)
• Scroll
This function is used to display characters longer than the LCD text display and
can be turned On/Off through the sound
quality control knob.
PA710RBG_RADIO
8. DISP Button
Turn ON/OFF the displayed data and
light on LCD.
When LCD Display is turned OFF, Press
ant button to turn ON display.
4 123
Features of your vehicle
• SDVC (Speed Dependent Volume
Control)
This function automatically adjusts the
volume level according to the speed of
the vehicle and can be turned On/Off
through the sound quality control knob.
• Media
Select default display of MP3 play information. “Folder/File” or “Artist/Title” can
be selected.
• Return(
)
This function displays the previous
MODE screen.
Off ➟ Low ➟ Mid ➟ High
❈ AM mode is not supported.
• Clock
Select the clock button. Time Format and
Time Setting can be adjusted.
PA710RBG_RADIO
10. TUNE & AUDIO Knob
• P.Bass (Power Bass)
Based on psychoacoustic technology,
this technology overcomes Bass limitations which may occur due to the limited
number and size of speakers to offer
dynamic BASS sound quality. It is possible to adjust in 3 levels of LOW/MID/
HIGH.
4 124
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency
and counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected
is shown on the display. After selecting
each mode, rotate the Audio control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Features of your vehicle
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counter
clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be
attenuated).
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
4 125
Features of your vehicle
2. TRACK Button
SEEK
TRACK
PA710RBG_CD
Using CD Player
1.
CD
Button
If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode. If
no CD, it displays “No Media” for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
• Push
button for less than 0.8
seconds to play from the beginning
of current song.
SEEK
• Push TRACK
button for less than 0.8
seconds and press again within 1 second to play the previous song.
SEEK
• Push TRACK
button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate reverse direction high speed
sound search of current song.
SEEK
• Push TRACK
button for less than 0.8
seconds to play the next song.
SEEK
• Push TRACK
button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate high speed sound search of
current song.
3.
1
Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’
mode.
• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc
are played back in a random
sequence.
• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files in
a disc are played back in the random
sequence.
4 126
4.
2
Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘FLD.RPT’
mode.
• RPT : Only a track(file) is repeatedly
played back.
• FLD.RPT (MP3/WMA Only) : Only files
in a folder are repeatedly played back.
5. CD Eject Button
Push
button for less than 0.8
seconds to eject the CD during CD playback. This button is enabled when ignition switch is off.
6. CD Slot
Please face printed side upward and
gently push in. When the ignition switch
is on ACC or ON and power is off, power
is automatically turned on if the CD is
loaded. This CDP supports only 12cm
CD. If VCD, Data CD are loaded,
"Reading Error" message will appear
and CD will be ejected.
Features of your vehicle
10. FOLDER Button
PA710RBG_CD
7. CD Indicator icon
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON
and if the CD is loaded, this indicator
icon is on. If the CD is ejected the icon is
off.
8. SCAN Button
Play each song in the CD for 10 seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
9. INFO
FOLDER button to move to
• Press
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE knob to move to the folder displayed. It will play the first song in
the folder.
• Press FOLDER
button to move to
parent folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE knob to move to the folder displayed.
PA710RBG_CD
11. TUNE Knob & ENTER
Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song. Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
Button
Displays the information of the current
CD TRACK (FILE) as below when the
button is pressed each time.
• CDDA : Disc Title ➟ Disc Artist ➟ Track
Title ➟ Track Artist ➟ Total Track
• MP3/WMA : File Name ➟ Title ➟ Artist
➟ Album ➟ Folder ➟ Total File (not displayed if the information is not available
on the DISC.)
4 127
Features of your vehicle
2. TRACK Button
SEEK
TRACK
PA710RBG_USB
Using USB device
1.
AUX
Button (USB)
If USB is connected, it switches to the
USB mode from the other mode to play
the song files stored in the USB. If no CD
and auxiliary device is not connected, it
displays "NO Media" for 3 seconds and
returns to the previous mode.
4 128
• Press the
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the current song.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec
onds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
song.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
SEEK
• Press the TRACK
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed
3.
1
Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘ALL RDM’
mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• ALL RDM : All files in a USB memory
are played back in the random
sequence.
4.
2
Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘FLD.RPT’
mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• ‘FLD.RPT’ : All files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
PA710RBG_USB
5. SCAN Button
Plays each song in the USB device for 10
seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
Features of your vehicle
6. INFO
Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of File Name ➟
Title ➟ Artist ➟ Album ➟ Folder ➟ Total
File ➟ Normal Display ➟ File Name...
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
PA710RBG_USB
7. FOLDER Button
8. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
FOLDER button to move to
• Press
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE / ENTER knob to move
to the folder displayed. It will play the
first song in the folder.
• Press FOLDER
button to move to
parent folder display the first song in
the folder.
Press TUNE / ENTER knob to move
to the folder displayed.
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to display the songs before the currently
played song. Press the button to skip and
play the selected song.
4 129
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
4 130
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio or CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT)
are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug type
connector products as shown
below.
4 131
Features of your vehicle
2. TRACK Button
SEEK
TRACK
PA710RBG_iPod
Using iPod®
❋ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1.
AUX
Button (iPod®)
If iPod® is connected, it switches to the
iPod® mode from the previous mode to
play the song files stored in the iPod®.
If there is no iPod® connected, then it displays the message "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
4 132
• Press the
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
SEEK
• Press the TRACK
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
3.
1
Button (RANDOM)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to shuffle order of all songs in
current category. (Song Random)
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to shuffle order of albums in current category. (Album Random)
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
4.
2
Button (REPEAT)
Repeats the song currently played.
PA710RBG_iPod
5.
6
Button (MENU)
Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod®.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press TUNE knob.
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod® ’s category is Playlist,
Artist,
Albums,
Genres,
Songs,
Composers.
Features of your vehicle
6. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
When you rotate the knob clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) ahead
of the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you rotate the knob counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
To listen to the song displayed in the
song category, press the button to skip to
and play the selected song.
PA710RBG_iPod
7. INFO
Button
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of Title ➟ Artist
➟ Album ➟ Normal Display ➟ Title...
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4 133
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod® models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPod® Mini
- iPod® 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) generation
- iPod® Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod® Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod® disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod®. (Reset:
Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally
on low battery.
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
4 134
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• The HYUNDAI iPod® Power Cable
is needed in order to operate
iPod® with the audio buttons on
the audio system. The USB cable
provided by Apple may cause
malfunction and should not be
used for HYUNDAI vehicles.
❋ The HYUNDAI iPod® Power
Cable may be purchased
through
your
HYUNDAI
Dealership.
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system, the sound effects of both
devices will overlap and might
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod®.
• When the iPod® cable is connected, the system can be switched to
AUX mode even without iPod®
device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod® cable when
you are not using the iPod®
device.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable
from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
Features of your vehicle
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY PHONE OPERATION
(if equipped)
4
1
is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology?
■ What
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows
multiple devices to be connected in a
short range, low-powered devices like
hands-free, stereo headset, wireless
remote control, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology
website
at
www.Bluetooth.com
■
2
3
1. VOLUME
speaker
2. CALL
call.
3. END
call.
4. MUTE
a call.
button : Raises or lowers
volume.
button : Places or transfers a
button : Rejects or ends a
: Mute the microphone during
■
Phone Setup
All Bluetooth® Wireless Technology-related operations can be performed in
PHONE menu.
1) Push the SETUP button to enter
SETUP mode.
2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
General Features
• This audio system supports Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology hands-free and
stereo-headset features.
- HANDS-FREE feature: Making or
receiving calls wirelessly.
- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing
music from cellular phones (that supports A2DP feature) wirelessly.
3) Select desired item by rotating the
TUNE knob, then push the knob.
✽ NOTICE
• The phone must be paired to the system before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology features.
• Only one selected (connected) cellular
phone can be used with the system at
a time.
• Some phones are not fully compatible
with this system.
4 135
Features of your vehicle
• Pairing a phone
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology features, the phone must be
paired (registered) with the audio system. Up to 5 phones can be paired with
the system.
✽ NOTICE
• The pairing procedure of the phone
varies according to each phone model.
Before attempting to pair phone,
please see your phone’s User’s Guide
for instructions.
• Once pairing with the phone is completed, there is no need to pair with
that phone again unless the phone is
deleted manually from the audio system (refer “Deleting a Phone” section)
or the vehicle’s information is
removed from the phone.
1. Press SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “PHONE”, then “PAIR” in
PHONE menu.
3. The audio displays “searching ---passkey: 0000”
4. Search the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology system on your phone
.Your phone should display your [vehicle model name] on the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device list. Then
attempt pairing on your phone.
4 136
✽ NOTICE
If the phone is paired to two or more
vehicles of the same model, i.e. both
vehicles are HYUNDAI ACCENT, some
phones may not handle Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology devices of that
name correctly. In this case, you may
need to change the name displayed on
your phone from Accent to Accent1 and
Accent2.
Refer to your phone’s User’s Guide, or
contact your cellular carrier or phone
manufacturer for instructions.
• Connecting a phone
Bluetooth®
Wireless
When
the
Technology system is enabled, the
phone previously used is automatically
selected and re-connected. If you want to
select different phone previously paired,
the phone can be selected through
“Select Phone” menu.
Only a selected phone can be used with
the hands-free system at a time.
1. Press SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “PHONE”, then “Select” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
Features of your vehicle
• Changing Priority
If several phones are paired with the
audio system, the system attempts to
connect following order when the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system
is enabled:
1) “Priority” checked phone.
2) Previously connected phone
3) Gives up auto connection.
1. Press SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “PHONE”, then “Priority” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
• Deleting a Phone
The paired phone can be deleted.
- When the phone is deleted, all the information associated with that phone is
also deleted (including phonebook).
- If you want to use the deleted phone
with the audio system again, pairing
procedure must be completed once
more.
1. Press SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “PHONE”, then “Delete” in
PHONE menu.
3. Select desired phone name from the
list shown.
• Turning Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology ON/OFF
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system
can be enabled (ON) or disabled (OFF)
by this menu.
- If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is
disabled, all the commands related to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system prompts whether you wish to turn
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ON or
not.
1. Press SETUP button to enter SETUP
mode.
2. Select “PHONE”, then “BT Off” in
PHONE menu.
4 137
Features of your vehicle
■
Receiving a Phone Call
When receiving a phone call, a ringtone
is audible from speakers and the audio
system changes into telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, “Incoming”
message and incoming phone number (if
available) are displayed on the audio.
• To Answer a Call:
- Press
button on the steering
wheel.
• To Reject a Call:
- Press
button on the steering
wheel.
• To Adjust Ring Volume:
- Use VOLUME buttons on the steering
wheel.
• To Transfer a Call to the Phone (Private
Call):
- Press and hold
button on the
steering wheel until the audio system
transfers a call to the phone.
4 138
■ Talking
on the Phone
When talking on the phone, “Active Calls”
message and the other party’s phone
number (if available) are displayed on the
audio.
• To Mute the Microphone
- Press
button on the audio.
• To Finish a Call
- Press
button on the steering
wheel.
■
Making a Phone Call
A Call Back can be made by pressing
button on the steering wheel.
- This is the same function as using the
button solely on the cellular
phone.
✽ NOTICE
Some phone models require pressing
button twice to make a call.
✽ NOTICE
In the following situations, you or the
other party may have difficulty hearing
each other:
1. Speaking at the same time, your voice
may not reach each other parties.
(This is not a malfunction.) Speak
alternately with the other party on the
phone.
2. Keep the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology volume to a low level.
High-level volume may result in distortion and echo.
3. When driving on a rough road.
4. When driving at high speeds.
5. When the window is open.
6. When the air conditioning vents are
facing the microphone.
7. When the sound of the air conditioning fan is loud.
Features of your vehicle
■
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Music
Streaming
This audio system supports A2DP (Audio
Advanced Distribution Profile) and
AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control
Profile).
Both profiles are available for listening to
the MP3 music via Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology cellular phone supporting
above Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
profiles.
To play MP3 music from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology cellular phone,
AUX
press the
button until “MP3
Play” is displayed on the LCD.
Then try playing music by phone.
When playing music from the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology cellular phone, the
head unit displays MP3 MODE.
✽ NOTICE
• Not only MP3 files, all the sounds that
the phone supports can be heard by
the audio system.
• The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
cellular phones shall feature A2DP
and AVRCP functions.
• Some A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology cellular phones
may not play music through the head
unit on first try. Please try the below;
i.e : Menu ➟ Filemanager ➟ Music ➟
Option ➟ Play via Bluetooth
• Please refer to User's Guide of your
phone for more.
To stop music, try stop playing music
from the phone then change the audio
mode to other than “MP3 Play” mode
(e.g. FM, AM, CD, etc.)
4 139
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING
BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS
TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR PHONE
• Do not use a cellular phone or
perform Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology settings (e.g. pairing
a phone) while driving.
• Some
Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology -enabled phones may
not be recognized by the system
or fully compatible with the system.
• Before using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features of
the audio system, refer your
phone’s User’s Manual for phoneWireless
side
Bluetooth®
Technology operations.
• The phone must be paired to the
audio system to use Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features.
• You will not be able to use the
hands-free feature when your
phone (in the car) is outside of
the cellular service area (e.g. in a
tunnel, in a underground, in a
mountainous area, etc.).
(Continued)
4 140
(Continued)
• If the cellular phone signal is poor
or the vehicles interior noise is
too loud, it may be difficult to hear
the other person’s voice during a
call.
• Do not place the phone near or
inside metallic objects, otherwise
communications with Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology system or
cellular service stations can be
disturbed.
• While a phone is connected
through Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for
additional Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology-related operations.
• Some cellular phones or other
devices may cause interference
noise or malfunction to audio
system. In this case, store the
device in a different location may
resolve the situation.
Features of your vehicle
■ USB AUDIO : H800RBG, H800RBGL, H800RBGE
RB_H800RBG_AUDIO
4 141
Features of your vehicle
H800RBG_AUDIO
Using RADIO, SETUP, VOLUME
and AUDIO CONTROL
3. SEEK Button
5. CLOCK Button
• When the SEEK button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency to
automatically select channel. Stops at
the previous frequency if no channel is
found.
TRACK
• When the
button is pressed,
it reduces the band frequency to automatically select channel. Stops at the
previous frequency if no channel is
found.
Press CLOCK Button less than 0.8 seconds to display the current clock until the
CLOCK Button push again.
Press CLOCK Button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to adjust clock and use the
TUNE knob to adjust hour & minute.
1. FM/AM Button
Turns to FM/AM mode and toggles FM1
and FM2➟AM➟FM1··· when the button is
pressed each time.
2. POWER Button & VOLUME
Knob
• Turns the audio system on/off when
the ignition switch is on ACC or ON.
• If the knob is turned clockwise/counterclockwise, the volume will increase
/decrease.
4 142
6. TUNE & AUDIO Knob
Turn this control while listening to a radio
channel to manually adjust frequency.
Turn clockwise to increase frequency
and counterclockwise to reduce frequency.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE TUNE
mode. The mode selected is shown on
the display. After selecting each mode,
rotate the Audio control knob clockwise
or counterclockwise.
H800RBG_AUDIO
4. PRESET Buttons
1
• Press
~ 6
buttons less
than 0.8 seconds to play the station
saved in each button.
1
• Press
~ 6
button more
than 0.8 seconds or longer to save the
current station to the respective button
with a beep.
• BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
Features of your vehicle
• TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.
• FADER Control
Turn the knob clockwise to emphasize
rear speaker sound (front speaker sound
will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, front speaker sound will be
emphasized (rear speaker sound will be
attenuated).
• BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned counter
clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound will be
attenuated).
4 143
Features of your vehicle
2. TRACK Button
TRACK
H800RBG_AUDIO
Using USB device
1.
AUX
Button (USB or AUX)
If the auxiliary device is connected, it
switches to AUX or USB mode to play the
sound from the auxiliary player.
If there is no auxiliary device, then the
message “No Media” will become displayed on the LCD for 3 seconds and
returns to previous mode.
• Press the
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the current song.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec
onds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
song.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the
button for less
SEEK
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
song. Press the button for 0.8 seconds
or longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
3.
2 RPT
Button (REPEAT)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RPT’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘FLD.RPT’
mode.
• RPT : Only a file is repeatedly played
back.
• ‘FLD.RPT’ : All files in a folder are
repeatedly played back.
4 144
4.
5 RDM
Button (RANDOM)
Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘RDM’ mode and more
than 0.8 seconds to activate ‘A.RDM’
mode.
• RDM : Only files in a folder are played
back in a random sequence.
• A.RDM : All files in a USB memory are
played back in the random sequence.
Features of your vehicle
5.
6 INFO
Button (INFO)
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of
FILE NAME ➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟
ALBUM ➟ FOLDER ➟ TOTAL FILE ➟
NORMAL DISPLAY ➟ FILE NAME…
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
6. FOLDER Button
FOLDER
• Press
button to move to
child folder of the current folder and
display the first song in the folder.
Press TUNE / ENTER knob to move
to the folder displayed. It will play the
first song in the folder.
• Press FOLDER button to move to parent folder display the first song in the
folder. Press TUNE / ENTER knob to
move to the folder displayed.
H800RBG_AUDIO
7. SCAN Button
Plays each song in the USB device for 10
seconds.
To cancel SCAN Play, press this button
again.
8. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
• Turn this knob clockwise to browse
songs after current song, or counter
clockwise to browse songs before current song. To play the displayed song,
press the knob.
• Pressing this knob without turning
enters to AUDIO CONTROL mode.
4 145
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION IN USING USB
DEVICE
• To use an external USB device,
make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle. Connect the device after
starting up.
• If you start the engine when the
USB device is connected, it may
damage the USB device. (USB
flashdrives are very sensitive to
electric shock.)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB
device is connected, the external
USB device may not work.
• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or
WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with
the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music
files with the compression rate
between 8Kbps~320Kbps.
• Take precautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnecting the external USB
device.
(Continued)
4 146
(Continued)
• An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is not
recognizable.
• Depending on the condition of
the external USB device, the connected external USB device can
be unrecognizable.
• When the formatted byte/sector
setting of External USB device is
not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,
then the device will not be recognized.
• Use only a USB device formatted
to FAT 12/16/32.
• USB devices without USB I/F
authentication may not be recognizable.
• Make sure the USB connection
terminal does not come in contact with the human body or other
objects.
• If you repeatedly connect or disconnect the USB device in a short
period of time, it may break the
device.
• You may hear a strange noise
when connecting or disconnecting a USB device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If you disconnect the external
USB device during playback in
USB mode, the external USB
device can be damaged or may
malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external USB device
when the audio is turned off or in
another mode. (e.g, Radio or CD)
• Depending on the type and
capacity of the external USB
device or the type of the files
stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device.
• Do not use the USB device for
purposes other than playing
music files.
• Use of USB accessories such as
rechargers or heaters using USB
I/F may lower performance or
cause trouble.
• If you use devices such as a USB
hub purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not
recognize the USB device. In that
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
(Continued)
Features of your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the USB device is divided by
logical drives, only the music files
on the highest-priority drive are
recognized by car audio.
• Devices such as MP3 Player/
Cellular phone/Digital camera can
be unrecognizable by standard
USB I/F can be unrecognizable.
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
• Some USB flash memory readers
(such as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or
external-HDD type devices can be
unrecognizable.
• Music files protected by DRM
(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.
• The data in the USB memory may
be lost while using this audio.
Always back up important data on
a personal storage device.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Please avoid using USB memory
products which can be used as
key chains or cellular phone
accessories as they could cause
damage to the USB jack. Please
make certain only to use plug
type connector products as
shown below.
4 147
Features of your vehicle
2. TRACK Button
TRACK
H800RBG_AUDIO
Using iPod
®
❋ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1.
AUX
Button (iPod®)
If iPod is connected, it switches to the
iPod® mode from the previous mode to
play the song files stored in the iPod®.
If there is no iPod® connected, then it displays the message "No Media" for 3 seconds and returns to the previous mode.
®
• Press the
button for less
than 0.8 seconds to play from the
beginning of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds and press it again within 1 second to move to and play the previous
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse
direction in fast speed.
• Press the
button for less
SEEK
than 0.8 seconds to move to the next
track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward
direction in fast speed.
3.
2 RPT
Button (REPEAT)
Repeats the song currently played.
4 148
4.
5 RDM
Button (RANDOM)
• Press this button for less than 0.8 seconds to shuffle order of all songs in
current category. (Song Random)
• Press this button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to shuffle order of albums in current category. (Album Random)
• To cancel RANDOM Play, press this
button again.
Features of your vehicle
H800RBG_AUDIO
H800RBG_AUDIO
5. 3 MENU Button (MENU)
7. TUNE Knob & ENTER Button
Moves to the upper category from currently played category of the iPod®.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press TUNE knob.
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod® ’s category is Playlist,
Artist,
Albums,
Genres,
Songs,
Composers.
When you rotate the knob clockwise, it
will display the songs (category) ahead
of the song currently played (category in
the same level).
Also, when you rotate the knob counterclockwise, it will display the songs (category) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
To listen to the song displayed in the
song category, press the button to skip to
and play the selected song.
6. 6 INFO
Button (INFO)
Displays the information of the file currently played in the order of
TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ NORMAL
DISPLAY ➟ TITLE... (Displays no information if the file has no song information.)
4 149
Features of your vehicle
✽ NOTICE FOR USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• Some iPod® models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played.
Supported iPod® models:
- iPod® Mini
- iPod® 4th (Photo) ~ 6th (Classic) generation
- iPod® Nano 1st~4th generation
- iPod® Touch 1st~2nd generation
• The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod® can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
• If the iPod® disabled due to its own
malfunction, reset the iPod®. (Reset:
Refer to iPod® manual)
• An iPod® may not operate normally
on low battery.
• Some iPod® devices, such as the
iPhone, can be connected through the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The
device can play, but it will not be controlled by the audio system.
4 150
CAUTION IN USING THE
iPod® DEVICE
• The HYUNDAI iPod® Power Cable
is (separeted USB, AUX jack type)
needed in order to operate iPod®
with the audio buttons on the
audio system. The USB cable provided by Apple may cause malfunction and should not be used
for HYUNDAI vehicles.
• When using this cable,
- Connect both AUX and USB
JACK to use iPod®.
- Unconnect both AUX and USB
JACK to remove iPod®.
❋ iPod® connection works only
when both AUX and USB are
plugged.
❋ The HYUNDAI iPod® Power
Cable may be purchased
through
your
HYUNDAI
Dealership.
• When connecting iPod® with the
iPod® Power Cable, insert the connector to the multimedia socket
completely. If not inserted completely, communications between
iPod® and audio may be interrupted.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When adjusting the sound effects
of the iPod® and the audio system, the sound effects of both
devices will overlap and might
reduce or distort the quality of the
sound.
• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod® when adjusting the audio system’s volume,
and turn off the equalizer of the
audio system when using the
equalizer of an iPod®.
• When the iPod® cable is connected, the system can be switched to
RADIO mode even without iPod®
device and may cause noise.
Disconnect the iPod® cable when
you are not using the iPod®
device.
• When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable
from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may
remain in accessory mode, and
may not work properly.
Before driving / 5-3
Key / 5-5
Engine Start/Stop button / 5-8
Manual transaxle / 5-14
Automatic transaxle / 5-17
Brake system / 5-23
Economical operation / 5-34
Special driving conditions / 5-36
Winter driving / 5-40
Trailer towing / 5-44
Vehicle weight / 5-53
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear
a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the
exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your
garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are
kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
5 2
Driving your vehicle
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle
Necessary inspections
Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles behind
you if you intend to back up.
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid
should be checked on a regular basis,
with the exact interval depending on the
fluid. Further details are provided in section 7, “Maintenance”.
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all controls are
easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning lights
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result
in a loss of vehicle control, that
may lead to an accident, severe
personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in
the safe and legal operation of a
vehicle, and use of any handheld
devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
from the safe operation of a vehicle
or which are not permissible by law
should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
WARNING
All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to “Seat belts” in section
3 for more information on their
proper use.
WARNING
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
5 3
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is dangerous.
Drunk driving is the number one
contributor to the highway death
toll each year. Even a small amount
of alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment. Driving
while under the influence of drugs
is as dangerous or more dangerous
than driving drunk.
You are much more likely to have a
serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive.
If you are drinking or taking drugs,
don’t drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver
or call a cab.
5 4
WARNING
• When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. It may overheat the engine
or exhaust system and cause fire.
• When you make a sudden stop or
turn the steering wheel rapidly,
loose objects may drop on the
floor and it could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Keep all things in the vehicle
safely stored.
• If you do not focus on driving, it
may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or
heater. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always drive safely.
Driving your vehicle
KEY
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative.
✽ NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
ORBC050001
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, push the key inward at
the ACC position and turn the key toward
the LOCK position.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is the
normal running position after the engine
is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the
engine is not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
START
Turn the ignition switch to the START
position to start the engine. The engine
will crank until you release the key; then
it returns to the ON position. The brake
warning lamp can be checked in this
position.
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch to
LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is
moving. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column lock
is not a substitute for the parking
brake. Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the shift
lever is engaged in 1st gear for the
manual transaxle or P (Park) for
the automatic transaxle, set the
parking brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur
if these precautions are not taken.
• Never reach for the ignition switch,
or any other controls through the
steering wheel while the vehicle is
in motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area could
cause a loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily injury
or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver’s seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an accident.
5 5
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal, and the clutch (if
equipped).
5 6
Starting the gasoline engine
(if equipped)
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START and
hold it there until the engine starts (a
maximum of 10 seconds), then
release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days, let
the engine warm up without depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing
the accelerator.
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are in
motion, do not attempt to move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position. If
traffic and road conditions permit,
you may put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the vehicle
is still moving and turn the ignition
switch to the START position in an
attempt to restart the engine.
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for more
than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls
or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds
before re-engaging the starter.
Improper use of the starter may
damage it.
Driving your vehicle
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while turning the ignition switch to the
start position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (neutral) position.
Glow indicator light
W-60
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position to pre-heat the engine. Then the
glow indicator light will illuminate.
4. If the glow indicator light goes out, turn
the ignition switch to the START position and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbo charger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to turn off the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or
turbo charger unit.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine were not started within 10
seconds after the preheating is completed, turn the ignition key once more to
the LOCK position during 10 seconds,
and then to the ON position, in order to
preheat again.
5 7
Driving your vehicle
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)
Engine start/stop button position
OFF
Not illuminated
ORB050005
Illuminated engine start/stop button
Whenever the front door is opened, the
engine start/stop button will illuminate for
your convenience. The light will go off
after about 30 seconds when the door is
closed.
5 8
• With manual transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop
the vehicle then press the engine
start/stop button.
• With automatic transaxle
To turn off the engine (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON position),
press the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
When you press the engine start/stop
button without the shift lever in the P
(Park) position, the engine start/stop button will not change to the OFF position
but to the ACC position.
Also, the steering wheel locks when the
engine start/stop button is in the OFF
position to protect you against theft. It
locks when the door is opened.
If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you open the driver's door, the
warning chime will sound. Try locking the
steering wheel again. If the problem is
not solved, have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In addition, if the engine start/stop button
is in the OFF position after the driver's
door is opened, the steering wheel will
not lock and the warning chime will
sound. In such a situation, close the door.
Then the steering wheel will lock and the
warning chime will stop.
✽ NOTICE
If the steering wheel doesn't unlock
properly, the engine start/stop button
will not work. Press the engine
start/stop button while turning the
steering wheel right and left to release
the tension.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
You are able to turn off the engine
(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),
only when the vehicle is not in
motion. In an emergency situation
while the vehicle is in motion, you are
able to turn the engine off and to the
ACC position by pressing the engine
start/stop button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3
seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by pressing the engine start/stop button with
the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
ACC(Accessory)
ON
Orange indicator
Blue indicator
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the OFF position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With manual transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button when
the button is in the ACC position without
depressing the clutch pedal.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the OFF position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and electrical accessories are operational.
If the engine start/stop button is in the
ACC position for more than 1 hour, the
button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge.
• With automatic transaxle
Press the engine start/stop button while it
is in the ACC position without depressing
the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not leave
the engine start/stop button in the ON
position for a long time. The battery may
discharge, because the engine is not
running.
5 9
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
START/RUN
If you leave the engine start/stop button
in the ACC or ON position for a long
time, the battery will discharge.
Not illuminated
• With manual transaxle
To start the engine, depress the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, then press the
engine start/stop button with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position.
• With automatic transaxle
To start the engine, depress the brake
pedal and press the engine start/stop
button with the shift lever in the P (Park)
or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
✽ NOTICE
If you press the engine start/stop button
without depressing the clutch pedal for
manual transaxle vehicles or without
depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehicles, the engine will not
start and the engine start/stop button
changes as follow:
OFF ➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC
5 10
WARNING
• Never press the engine start/stop
button while the vehicle is in
motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking
function, which could cause an
accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving the
driver's seat, always make sure
the shift lever is engaged in P
(Park), set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the engine start/
stop button or any other controls
through the steering wheel while
the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in the
area could cause loss of vehicle
control, an accident and serious
bodily injury or death.
• Do not place any movable objects
around the driver's seat as they
may move while driving, interfere
with the driver and lead to an
accident.
Driving your vehicle
Starting the engine
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots,etc.) may interfere with your
ability to use the brake and accelerator pedal.
Starting the gasoline engine
(if equipped)
1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside
the vehicle.
2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly
applied.
3. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while starting the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Press the engine start/stop button.
5. In extremely cold weather (below 18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle has not
been operated for several days, let the
engine warm up without depressing
the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without depressing the
accelerator.
Starting the diesel engine
(if equipped)
To start the diesel engine when the
engine is cold, it has to be pre-heated
before starting the engine and then have
to be warmed up before starting to drive.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutch
pedal and brake pedal depressed
while pressing the engine start/stop
button to the START position.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when the
shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
5 11
Driving your vehicle
Glow indicator light
W-60
3. Press the engine start/stop button
while depressing the brake pedal.
4. Continue depressing the brake pedal
until the illuminated glow indicator
goes off. (approximately 5 seconds)
5. The engine starts running when the
glow indicator goes off.
✽ NOTICE
If the engine start/stop button is pressed
once more while the engine is pre-heating, the engine may start.
5 12
Starting and stopping the engine for turbocharger intercooler
1. Do not race or accelerate the engine
immediately after starting.
If the engine is cold, idle for several
seconds before sufficient lubrication is
ensured in the turbocharger unit.
2. After high speed or extended driving,
requiring a heavy engine load, idle the
engine about 1 minute before turning it
off.
This idle time will allow the turbocharger to cool prior to turn off the
engine.
CAUTION
Do not turn off the engine immediately after it has been subjected to
a heavy load. Doing so may cause
severe damage to the engine or turbocharger unit.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,
if it is far away from you, the engine
may not start.
• When the engine start/stop button is in
the ACC position or above, if any door
is opened, the system checks for the
smart key. If the smart key is not in the
vehicle, the "
" indicator will blink or
the warning "Key is not in vehicle" will
illuminate on the LCD display. And if all
doors are closed, the chime will sound
for 5 seconds. The indicator or warning
will turn off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with you.
WARNING
The engine will start, only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
Never allow children or any person
who is unfamiliar with the vehicle
touch the engine start/stop button
or related parts.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
is in motion, do not attempt to move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If the traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving and
press the engine start/stop button
in an attempt to restart the engine.
Do not press the engine start/stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
ORB050007
✽ NOTICE
• If the battery is weak or the smart key
does not work correctly, you can start
the engine by pressing the engine
start/stop button with the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you
can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If it
is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the engine start/
stop button for 10 seconds while it is
in the ACC position. The engine can
start without depressing the brake
pedal. But for your safety always
depress the brake pedal before starting the engine.
5 13
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Manual transaxle operation
The shift lever can be moved without
pulling the button (1).
The button (1) must be pulled up while
moving the shift lever.
ORB051001N
5 14
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears.
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ignition lock switch, the engine will not start
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal. (if equipped)
The gearshift lever must be returned to
the neutral position before shifting into R
(Reverse). Push the button located
immediately below the shift knob and pull
the gearshift lever to the left sufficiently,
and then shift into the reverse (R) gear
position. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
CAUTION
• When downshifting from fifth
gear to fourth gear, caution
should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that
second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the
point that the tachometer will
enter the red-zone. Such overrevving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.
• Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear when
the engine is running at high
speed (5,000 RPM or higher).
Such a downshifting may damage
the engine.
Driving your vehicle
• During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant is
warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
• If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),
leave the shift lever at N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the
clutch pedal back down, and then shift
into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position.
CAUTION
• To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on an
uphill grade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
• Do not use the shift lever as a
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of
the transaxle shift forks.
WARNING
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake fully
and shut the engine off. Then
make sure the transaxle is shifted
into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level or uphill grade,
and shifted into R (Reverse) on a
downhill grade. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are not
followed in the order identified.
• If your vehicle has a manual
transaxle not equipped with a
ignition lock switch, it may move
and cause a serious accident
when starting the engine without
depressing the clutch pedal while
the parking brake is released and
the shift lever not in the
N(Neutral) position.
Using the clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly. The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear.
Do not partially engage the clutch to hold
the vehicle on an incline. This causes
unnecessary wear. Use the foot brake or
parking brake to hold the vehicle on an
incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal
rapidly and repeatedly.
CAUTION
• When operating the clutch pedal,
press the clutch pedal down fully.
If you don’t press the clutch pedal
fully, the clutch may be damaged
or noise may occur.
• To prevent possible damage to
the clutch system, do not start
with the 2nd (second) gear
engaged except when you start
on a slippery road.
5 15
Driving your vehicle
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up steep hills, downshift before the engine starts to labor.
Downshifting reduces the chance of
stalling and gives better acceleration
when you again need to increase your
speed. When the vehicle is traveling
down steep hills, downshifting helps
maintain safe speed and prolongs brake
life.
5 16
Good driving practices
• Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This is extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear.
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, shift to a lower gear. When
you do this, engine braking will help
slow down the vehicle.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
• Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle.
• Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse,
depress the clutch, move the shift lever
to neutral, wait three seconds, then
shift to the reverse position.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
Driving your vehicle
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
Automatic transaxle operation
Left-Hand drive type
The automatic transaxle has 4 forward
speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically,
depending on the position of the shift
lever.
Right-Hand drive type
✽ NOTICE
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if
the battery has been disconnected, may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and the shifting sequence will
adjust after shifts are cycled a few times
by the TCM (Transaxle Control
Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control
Module).
Depress the brake pedal when shifting. (If your vehicle is installed shift lock system)
The selector lever can be shifted freely.
ORB050004/ORB050004R
5 17
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the brake
pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a
forward or reverse gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
• Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before
shifting a car into D (Drive) or R
(Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (Park) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the
brakes on.
• When stopped on an incline, do
not hold the vehicle stationary
with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P
(Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Transaxle ranges
The indicator in the instrument cluster
displays the shift lever position when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into P (Park). This position locks
the transaxle and prevents the drive
wheels from rotating.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause the
drive wheels to lock which will
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) position
in place of the parking brake.
Always make sure the shift lever
is latched in the P (Park) position
and set the parking brake fully.
• Never leave a child unattended in
a vehicle.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged if
you shift into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion.
5 18
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle” in this section.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transaxle are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or service brakes are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transaxle will automatically shift
through a 4-gear sequence, providing the
best fuel economy and power.
Left-Hand drive type
+ (UP)
Sports mode
- (DOWN)
ORB050008
Right-Hand drive type
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing grades, depress the
accelerator fully, at which time the
transaxle will automatically downshift to
the lower gear.
+ (UP)
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop before
shifting into D (Drive).
Sports mode
- (DOWN)
ORB050008R
Sports mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D
(Drive) range operation, push the shift
lever back into the main gate.
5 19
Driving your vehicle
In sports mode, moving the shift lever
backwards and forwards will allow you to
make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to
shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
5 20
✽ NOTICE
• In sports mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road
conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
• In sports mode, only the 4 forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the shift lever
to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position
as required.
• In sports mode, downshifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows
down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear
is automatically selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine rpm
approaches the red zone shift points
are varied to upshift automatically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety, the
system may not execute certain
gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
+(up) position. This causes the
transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
which is better for smooth driving on
a slippery road. Push the shift lever to
the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st
gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic transaxle
has a shift lock system which prevents
shifting the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse) unless the
brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle from P (Park) or N
(Neutral) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
switch to the ON position (RHD vehicle
only).
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position, a chattering
noise near the shift lever may be heard.
This is a normal condition.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting out
of the P (Park) position into another position to avoid inadvertent
motion of the vehicle which could
injure persons in or around the car.
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
ORB052040R
Shift-lock override (RHD vehicle only)
If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position into R
(Reverse) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, then do the following:
1. Press the shift-lock release button.
2. Move the shift lever.
3. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer immediately.
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)
when the vehicle is in motion.
• Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into R
(Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Never take the car out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be
extremely hazardous. Always leave the
car in gear when moving.
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving
down a long hill, slow down and shift to
a lower gear. When you do this, engine
braking will help slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may
not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in P
(Park) to keep the car from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface,
an abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
5 21
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
• Always buckle-up! In a collision,
an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously
injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as sharp
lane changes or fast, sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of
your vehicle at highway speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off the
roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
• In the event your vehicle leaves
the roadway, do not steer sharply.
Instead, slow down before pulling
back into the travel lanes.
• Never exceed posted speed limits.
5 22
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
Moving up a steep grade from a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift
the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade, and
release the parking brake. Depress the
accelerator gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
Driving your vehicle
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a stalled
engine or some other reason, you can
still stop your vehicle by applying greater
force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially depleted
each time the brake pedal is applied. Do
not pump the brake pedal when the
power assist has been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining
and pad wear, and increased
stopping distances.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When descending a long or steep
hill, shift to a lower gear and
avoid continuous application of
the brakes. Continuous brake
application will cause the brakes
to overheat and could result in a
temporary loss of braking performance.
• Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s ability to safely slow down;
the vehicle may also pull to one
side when the brakes are applied.
Applying the brakes lightly will
indicate whether they have been
affected in this way. Always test
your brakes in this fashion after
driving through deep water. To
dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
• Always, confirm the position of
the brake and accelerator pedal
before driving. If you don't check
the position of the accelerator
and brake pedal before driving,
you may depress the accelerator
instead of the brake pedal. It may
cause a serious accident.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while the
vehicle is in motion, you can make an
emergency stop with the parking brake.
The stopping distance, however, will be
much greater than normal.
WARNING - Parking brake
Applying the parking brake while
the vehicle is moving at normal
speeds can cause a sudden loss of
control of the vehicle. If you must
use the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
5 23
Driving your vehicle
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and new
pads are required, you will hear a highpitched warning sound from your front
brakes or rear brakes. You may hear this
sound come and go or it may occur
whenever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when you first apply (or lightly
apply) the brakes. This is normal and
does not indicate a problem with your
brakes.
CAUTION
• To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
• Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs service.
If you ignore this audible warning,
you will eventually lose braking
performance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
5 24
CAUTION
• Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
• Do not operate the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving except
in an emergency situation. It could
damage the vehicle system and
make endanger driving safety.
ORB050003
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then pull up the parking brake lever as far as possible.
In addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on a incline, the shift
lever should be in a low gear on manual
transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position on automatic transaxle vehicles.
Driving your vehicle
If the parking brake does not release or
does not release all the way, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
ORB050002
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly depress the
release button (1) and lower the parking
brake lever (2) while holding the button.
• To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving
the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely positioned in 1st (First) gear or R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle
equipped vehicles and in P (Park)
for automatic transaxle equipped
vehicles.
• Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch
the parking brake. If the parking
brake is released unintentionally,
serious injury may occur.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle
which can injure occupants or
pedestrians.
WK-23
Check the brake warning light by turning
the ignition switch ON (do not start the
engine). This light will be illuminated
when the parking brake is applied with
the ignition switch in the START or ON
position.
Before driving, be sure the parking brake
is fully released and the brake warning
light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released while
engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate
attention is necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not possible,
use extreme caution while operating the
vehicle and only continue to drive the
vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.
5 25
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
WARNING
ABS (or ESP) will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even
though vehicle control is improved
during emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle
speeds should always be reduced
during extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars
equipped with an anti-lock braking
system (or Electronic Stability
Program system) may be longer
than for those without it in the following road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced
speeds:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• With tire chains installed.
(Continued)
5 26
(Continued)
• On roads where the road surface
is pitted or has different surface
height.
The safety features of an ABS (or
ESP) equipped vehicle should not
be tested by high speed driving or
cornering. This could endanger the
safety of yourself or others.
The ABS continuously senses the speed
of the wheels. If the wheels are going to
lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum benefit
from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to pump
your brakes. Press your brake pedal as
hard as possible or as hard as the situation warrants and allow the ABS to control the force being delivered to the
brakes.
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
CAUTION
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the anti-lock brake system
is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake system,
your vehicle still requires sufficient
stopping distance. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system
may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a
conventional brake system.
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on and
stays on, you may have a problem
with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work
normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay on
for approximately 3 seconds after
the ignition switch is ON. During
that time, the ABS will go through
self-diagnosis and the light will go
off if everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road having
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operate your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop the
engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS
system
is
normal.
Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the engine
may not run as smoothly and the ABS
warning light may turn on at the same
time. This happens because of the low
battery voltage. It does not mean your
ABS is malfunctioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
5 27
Driving your vehicle
Left-Hand drive type
WARNING
ORB050009
Right-Hand drive type
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cornering. Electronic stability program
(ESP) will not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers and hydroplaning on
wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and
attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction.
Even with ESP installed, always follow all the normal precautions for
driving - including driving at safe
speeds for the conditions.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is an electronic system designed
to help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices.
Factors including speed, road conditions
and driver steering input can all affect
whether ESP will be effective in
preventing a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you
may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation
in the brake pedal. This is normal and it
means your ESP is active.
✽ NOTICE
ORB052009R
Electronic stability program (ESP)
(if equipped)
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESP
checks where you are steering and
where the vehicle is actually going.
ESP applies the brakes at individual
wheels and intervenes in the engine
management system to stabilize the
vehicle.
5 28
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehicle
begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and
indicate that the Electronic Stability
Program System is functioning properly.
Driving your vehicle
ESP operation
ESP ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, ESP and ESP OFF indicator lights illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then ESP is turned on.
• Press the ESP OFF button
after turning the ignition ON
to turn ESP off. (ESP OFF
indicator will illuminate). To
turn the ESP on, press the
ESP OFF button (ESP OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight ticking
sound. This is the ESP performing an automatic system
self-check and does not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the ESP is in operation,
ESP indicator light blinks.
• When the Electronic Stability
Program is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only
the effect of brake control and
indicates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of the mud
or slippery road, the engine
rpm (revolution per minute)
may not be increased even if
you press the accelerator
pedal deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction
of the vehicle and does not
indicate a problem.
ESP operation off
ESP OFF state
• To cancel ESP operation,
press the ESP OFF button
(ESP OFF indicator light illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is turned
to LOCK position when ESP
is off, ESP remains off. Upon
restarting the engine, the
ESP will automatically turn on
again.
5 29
Driving your vehicle
■ ESP indicator light
■ ESP OFF indicator light
CAUTION
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESP system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
WARNING
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON, the
indicator light illuminates, then goes off if
the ESP system is operating normally.
The ESP indicator light blinks whenever
ESP is operating or illuminates when
ESP fails to operate.
ESP OFF indicator light comes on when
the ESP is turned off with the button.
5 30
The Electronic Stability Program
system is only a driving aid; use
precautions for safe driving by
slowing down on curved, snowy, or
icy roads. Drive slowly and don’t
attempt to accelerate whenever the
ESP indicator light is blinking, or
when the road surface is slippery.
ESP OFF usage
When driving
• ESP should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible.
• To turn ESP off while driving, press the
ESP OFF button while driving on a flat
road surface.
Never press the ESP OFF button while
ESP is operating (ESP indicator light
blinks).
If ESP is turned off while ESP is operating, the vehicle may slip out of control.
✽ NOTICE
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, ensure that the ESP is
turned off (ESP OFF light illuminated).
• Turning the ESP off does not affect
ABS or brake system operation.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Never press the ESP OFF button
while ESP is operating.
If the ESP is turned off while ESP is
operating, the vehicle may go out of
control.
To turn ESP off while driving, press
the ESP OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Vehicle stability management
(VSM) (if equipped)
This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering
responses when a vehicle is driving on a
slippery road or a vehicle detected
changes in coefficient of friction between
right wheels and left wheels when braking.
VSM operation
When the VSM is in operation, ESP indicator light (
) blinks.
When the vehicle stability management
is operating properly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control and is a normal
operating condition.
The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as gradient
or incline
• Driving rearward
• ESP OFF indicator light (
) remains
on the instrument cluster
• EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off
If you press the ESP OFF button to turn
off the ESP, the VSM will also cancel and
the ESP OFF indicator light (
) illuminates.
To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESP OFF indicator light goes
out.
Malfunction indicator
The VSM can be deactivated even if you
don’t cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESP OFF button. It indicates that
a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESP indicator
light (
) or EPS warning light remains
on, take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system
checked.
✽ NOTICE
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 15 km/h (9 mph)
on curves.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 30 km/h (18
mph) when a vehicle is braking on a
split-mu road. The split-mu road is
made of surfaces which have different
friction forces.
5 31
Driving your vehicle
Good braking practices
WARNING
• The Vehicle Stability Management
system is not a substitute for
safe driving practices but a supplementary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Always hold the steering wheel
firmly while driving.
• Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver’s
intention, even with installed
VSM. Always follow all the normal
precautions for driving at safe
speeds for the conditions –
including driving inclement
weather and on a slippery road.
• Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSM system
to malfunction. When replacing
tires, make sure they are the
same size as your original tires.
5 32
WARNING
• Whenever leaving vehicle or
parking, always set the parking
brake as far as possible and fully
engage the vehicle's transaxle
into the park position. Vehicles
not fully engaged in park with the
parking brake set are at risk for
moving inadvertently and injuring yourself or others.
• All vehicles should always have
the parking brake fully engaged
when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which
can injure occupants or pedestrians.
• After parking the vehicle, check to be
sure the parking brake is not engaged
and that the parking brake indicator
light is out before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the car is washed. Wet brakes
can be dangerous! Your car will not
stop as quickly if the brakes are wet.
Wet brakes may cause the car to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns to
normal, taking care to keep the car
under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop
as soon as it is safe to do so and call
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the car out
of gear. This is extremely hazardous.
Keep the car in gear at all times, use
the brakes to slow down, then shift to a
lower gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting
your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can
result in the brakes overheating and
losing their effectiveness. It also
increases the wear of the brake components.
Driving your vehicle
• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,
apply the brakes gently and keep the
car pointed straight ahead while you
slow down. When you are moving
slowly enough for it to be safe to do so,
pull off the road and stop in a safe
place.
• If your car is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your car
creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the
brake pedal when the car is stopped.
• Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the shift lever in P. If your car is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb to
help keep the car from rolling. If there
is no curb or if it is required by other
conditions to keep the car from rolling,
block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when
there is an accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if the
brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the
parking brake may freeze, apply it only
temporarily while you put the shift lever
in P and block the rear wheels so the
car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat.
Always use the brake pedal or parking
brake.
5 33
Driving your vehicle
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where you
drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how many
miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate your vehicle
as economically as possible, use the following driving suggestions to help save
money in both fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts
or full-throttle shifts and maintain a
steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever
possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can
avoid unnecessary braking. This also
reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
5 34
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This can
increase fuel consumption and also
increase wear on these components.
In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the
brakes to overheat, which reduces
their effectiveness and may lead to
more serious consequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can
result from hitting curbs or driving too
fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may
also result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see section 7
for details).
• Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your vehicle should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not
in traffic), turn off your engine and
restart only when you're ready to go.
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After the
engine has started, allow the engine to
run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold
weather, however, give your engine a
slightly longer warm-up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended
speeds.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset some of
this loss, slow down when driving in
these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for economy and
safety. Therefore, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform scheduled
inspections and maintenance.
WARNING - Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast
down hills or anytime the vehicle is
in motion. The power steering and
power brakes will not function
properly without the engine running. Instead, keep the engine on
and downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect. In
addition, turning off the ignition
while driving could engage the
steering wheel lock resulting in
loss of vehicle steering which
could cause serious injury or
death.
5 35
Driving your vehicle
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Rocking the vehicle
WARNING - ABS
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
1JBB3302
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use
second gear. Accelerate slowly to
avoid spinning the drive wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction when stalled
in ice, snow, or mud.
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions are
encountered such as water, snow, ice,
mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow
these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in braking or
steering.
• When braking with non-ABS brakes
pump the brake pedal with a light upand-down motion until the vehicle is
stopped.
5 36
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slippery
surfaces can cause an accident.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. Be
careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to
free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn
the steering wheel right and left to clear
the area around your front wheels. Then,
shift back and forth between 1st (First)
and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped
with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transaxle.
Do not race the engine, and spin the
wheels as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle
pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid
engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, especially
at speeds more than 56 km/h (35
mph). Spinning the wheels at high
speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat
which could result in tire damage
that may injure bystanders.
✽ NOTICE
The ESP system should be turned OFF
prior to rocking the vehicle.
WARNING
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
snow, mud, sand, etc., then you
may attempt to rock the vehicle free
by moving it forward and backward.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking
operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward of backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or
objects.
OBH058035L
OMC035004
Smooth cornering
Driving at night
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet.
Ideally, corners should always be taken
under gentle acceleration. If you follow
these suggestions, tire wear will be held
to a minimum.
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight, here
are some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance
between you and other vehicles, as it
may be more difficult to see at night,
especially in areas where there may
not be any street lights.
5 37
Driving your vehicle
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare
from other driver's headlights.
• Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped
with the automatic headlight aiming
feature. Dirty or improperly aimed
headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlights
of oncoming vehicles. You could be
temporarily blinded, and it will take
several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
5 38
Driving in the rain
Driving in flooded areas
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a
few things to consider when driving in the
rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to
see and will increase the distance
needed to stop your vehicle, so slow
down.
• Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your
windshield wiper blades when they
show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condition,
making a quick stop on wet pavement
can cause a skid and possibly lead to
an accident. Be sure your tires are in
good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles
can affect your brakes. If you must go
through puddles, try to drive through
them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking operation returns.
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub.
Drive through any water slowly. Allow
adequate stopping distance because
brake performance may be affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several
times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with the
off-road conditions where you are going
to drive before you begin driving.
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
OMG015008
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pressures
will result in overheating and possible
failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
• Underinflated or overinflated
tires can cause poor handling,
loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death.
Always check tires for proper
inflation before driving. For proper tire pressures, refer to “Tires
and wheels” in section 8.
• Driving on tires with no or insufficient tread is dangerous. Wornout tires can result in loss of
vehicle control, collisions, injury,
and even death. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
the tire tread before driving your
car. For further information and
tread limits, refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 7.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to
check both engine coolant and engine
oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
✽ NOTICE
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
5 39
Driving your vehicle
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or icy conditions
1JBB3305
More severe weather conditions of winter
result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize winter driving problem,
you should follow these suggestions:
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to
install tire chains on your tires. If snow
tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and type of the
original equipment tires. Failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking
to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause
skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in
operation in front and your vehicle. Also,
apply the brake gently. It should be noted
that installing tire chains on the tire will
provide a greater driving force, but will
not prevent side skids.
✽ NOTICE
Tire chains are not legal in all countries.
Check country laws before fitting tire
chains.
5 40
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,
make sure they are radial tires of the
same size and load range as the original
tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels
to balance your vehicle’s handling in all
weather conditions. Keep in mind that the
traction provided by snow tires on dry
roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.
WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent in
size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety
and handling of your vehicle may
be adversely affected.
Do not install studded tires without first
checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against
their use.
Driving your vehicle
CAUTION
1JBA4068
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do
not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; snow
chains may cause damage to the wheels.
If snow chains must be used, use wiretype chains with a thickness of less than
12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your vehicle
caused by improper snow chain use is
not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
• Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your
tires. Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle body
and suspension and may not be
covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty. Also, the snow
chain connecting hooks may be
damaged from contacting vehicle
components causing the snow
chains to come loose from the
tire. Make sure the snow chains
are SAE class “S” certified.
• Always check chain installation
for proper mounting after driving
approximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to
0.6 miles) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the
chains if they are loose.
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as
tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
chains installed. If you hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make contact,
slow down until it stops. Remove the
chains as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
WARNING
- Mounting chains
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and place
a triangular emergency warning
device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P
(Park), apply the parking brake and
turn off the engine before installing
snow chains.
5 41
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Tire chains
• The use of chains may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph)
or the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, sharp turns, and other
road hazards, which may cause
the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or lockedwheel braking.
CAUTION
• Chains that are the wrong size or
improperly installed can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
chains any time you hear them
hitting the vehicle.
5 42
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant
Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
Your vehicle is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents
freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish
your coolant in accordance with the
maintenance schedule in section 7.
Before winter, have your coolant tested to
assure that its freezing point is sufficient
for the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
In some climates it is recommended that
a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be
used during cold weather. See section 8
for recommendations. If you aren't sure
what weight oil you should use, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section
7. The level of charge in your battery can
be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer or a service station.
Check spark plugs and ignition
system
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
section 7 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
Driving your vehicle
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into
the key opening. If a lock is covered with
ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing
fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is
frozen internally, you may be able to thaw
it out by using a heated key. Handle the
heated key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do
not use engine coolant or other types of
anti-freeze as these may damage the
paint finish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged position.
This is most likely to happen when there
is an accumulation of snow or ice around
or near the rear brakes or if the brakes
are wet. If there is a risk the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then
release the parking brake.
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should
carry appropriate emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or chains,
flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a
shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,
gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,
etc.
Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice
can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in
severe winter conditions where this may
happen, you should periodically check
underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering
components is not obstructed.
5 43
Driving your vehicle
TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering towing with your
vehicle, you should first check with your
country's Department of Motor Vehicles
to determine their legal requirements.
Since laws vary the requirements for towing trailers, cars, or other types of vehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for further
details before towing.
WARNING - Towing a trailer
If you don't use the correct equipment and/or drive improperly, you
can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work
well - or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously or
fatally injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in
this section.
✽ NOTICE - For Europe
• The technically permissible maximum
load on the rear axle(s) may be
exceeded by not more than 15 % and
the technically permissible maximum
laden mass of the vehicle may be
exceeded by not more than 10 % or
100 kg (220.4 lbs), whichever value is
lower. In this case, do not exceed 100
km/h (62.1 mph) for vehicle of category M1 or 80 km/h (49.7 mph) for vehicle of category N1.
• When towing a trailer, the additional
load imposed at the trailer coupling
device may cause the rear tire maximum load ratings to be exceeded, but
not by more than 15%. In such a case,
do not exceed 100km/h, and the rear
tire pressure should be at least 20 kPa
(0.2 bar) above the tire pressure(s) as
recommended for normal use (i.e.
without a trailer attached).
CAUTION
WARNING - Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total
trailer weight, GCW (gross combination weight), GVW (gross vehicle
weight), GAW (gross axle weight )
and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
5 44
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in
costly repairs not covered by your
warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify
what the vehicle trailering capacity is for
your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the trailer” that
appears later in this section.
Remember that trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling,
durability, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Driving your vehicle
This section contains many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your
safety and that of your passengers.
Please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the
engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies, and
tires are forced to work harder against
the load of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher
speeds and under greater loads. This
additional burden generates extra heat.
The trailer also adds considerably to
wind resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
■ 4Door
Hitches
ORBR060009
■ 5Door
ORB062009
✽ NOTICE - Location of trailer
It's important to have the correct hitch
equipment. Crosswinds, large trucks
going by, and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
• Will you have to make any holes in the
body of your vehicle when you install a
trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to
seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch.
If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can
get into your vehicle, as well as dirt and
water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not
intended for hitches. Do not attach
rental hitches or other bumper-type
hitches to them. Use only a framemounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI accessory trailer hitch is
available at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
mounting
The mounting hole for hitches are located on both sides of the underbody
behind the rear tires.
5 45
Driving your vehicle
Safety chains
Trailer brakes
Driving with a trailer
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer.
Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not
drop to the road if it becomes separated
from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by
the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trailer.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to your
country’s regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weight exceeds the maximum allowed weight without trailer
brakes, then the trailer will also require its
own brakes as well. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions for the trailer
brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
• Don’t tap into or modify your vehicle's
brake system.
Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting out
for the open road, you must get to know
your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the
feel of handling and braking with the
added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not
nearly so responsive as your vehicle is
by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch
and platform, safety chains, electrical
connector(s), lights, tires and mirror
adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are
working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be
sure that the load is secure, and that the
lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
WARNING - Trailer brakes
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely
certain that you have properly set
up the brake system. This is not a
task for amateurs. Use an experienced, competent trailer shop for
this work.
5 46
Driving your vehicle
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving
your vehicle without a trailer. This can
help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up
ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,
because of the increased vehicle length,
you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel
with one hand. Then, to move the trailer
to the left, just move your hand to the left.
To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide
you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer, make
wider turns than normal. Do this so your
trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,
road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has
to have a different turn signal flasher and
extra wiring. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you
signal a turn or lane change. Properly
connected, the trailer lights will also flash
to alert other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows
on your instrument panel will flash for
turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signals
when, in fact, they are not. It’s important
to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. You must also
check the lights every time you disconnect and then reconnect the wires.
Do not connect a trailer lighting system
directly to your vehicle’s lighting system.
Use only an approved trailer wiring harness.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring harness.
5 47
Driving your vehicle
WARNING
Failure to use an approved trailer
wiring harness could result in damage to the vehicle electrical system
and/or personal injury.
5 48
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear
before you start down a long or steep
downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you
might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer
operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and
reduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45
mph) to reduce the possibility of engine
and transaxle overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes
and you have an automatic transaxle,
you should drive in D (Drive) when towing a trailer.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) when
towing a trailer will minimize heat build up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
CAUTION
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not overheat.
If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the
dial towards “H” (HOT), pull over
and stop as soon as it is safe to
do so, and allow the engine to idle
until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled
sufficiently.
• You must decide driving speed
depending on trailer weight and
uphill grade to reduce the possibility of engine and transaxle
overheating.
Driving your vehicle
Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached to
your vehicle, you should not park your
vehicle on a hill. People can be seriously
or fatally injured, and both your vehicle
and the trailer can be damaged if unexpectedly roll down hill.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill with a
trailer attached could cause serious injury or death, should the trailer break loose.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.
Turn the steering wheel in the direction
of the curb (right if headed down hill,
left if headed up hill).
2. If the vehicle has a manual transaxle,
place the car in neutral. If the vehicle
has an automatic transaxle, place the
car in P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off the
vehicle.
4. Place chocks under the trailer wheels
on the down hill side of the wheels.
5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shift
to neutral, release the parking brake
and slowly release the brakes until the
trailer chocks absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the parking brake and shift the vehicle to R
(Reverse) for manual transaxle or P
(Park) for automatic transaxle.
7. Shut off the vehicle and release the
vehicle brakes but leave the parking
brake set.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake is
not firmly set.
If you have left the engine running,
the vehicle can move suddenly. You
or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
5 49
Driving your vehicle
When you are ready to leave after parking on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in Neutral
or automatic transaxle in P (Park),
apply your brakes and hold the brake
pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of
the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and
store the chocks.
5 50
Maintenance when trailer towing
Your vehicle will need service more often
when you regularly pull a trailer.
Important items to pay particular attention to include engine oil, automatic
transaxle fluid, axle lubricant and cooling
system fluid. Brake condition is another
important item to frequently check. Each
item is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your trailer
and hitch. Follow the maintenance
schedule that accompanied your trailer
and check it periodically. Preferably, conduct the check at the start of each day’s
driving. Most importantly, all hitch nuts
and bolts should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during trailer
usage, overheating might occur
in hot days or during uphill driving. If the coolant gauge indicates
over-heating, switch off the A/C
and stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan to
improve engine performance
when towing a trailer.
Driving your vehicle
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if you
decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You can
ask a hitch dealer about sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in
order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 100 km/h (60
mph)).
• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed
70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower.
• The chart contains important considerations that have to do with weight:
Engine
1.4L
M/T
A/T
Item
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (Ibs.)
Without brake 450
(992)
System
With brake
System
Maximum permissible static
vertical load on the coupling
device
kg (Ibs.)
Recommended distance from
rear wheel center to coupling
point
Diesel Engine
Gasoline Engine
450
(992)
1.6L
M/T
A/T
450
(992)
450
(992)
1.6L
M/T
A/T
450
(992)
450
(992)
1000
800
1000
800
1000
800
(2204) (1763) (2204) (1763) (2204) (1763)
50
(110)
4 Door : 1077 (42.4)
5 Door : 825 (32.5)
mm (inch)
M/T : Manual transaxle
A/T : Automatic transaxle
5 51
Driving your vehicle
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 10% of the total loaded trailer
weight, within the limits of the maximum
permissible trailer tongue load. After
you've loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct them
simply by moving some items around in
the trailer.
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle Weight
C190E01JM
C190E02JM
Weight of the trailer
What is the maximum safe weight of a
trailer? It should never weigh more than
the maximum trailer weight with trailer
brakes. But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your
trailer. For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how
often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer
are all important. The ideal trailer weight
can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure because it
affects the total gross vehicle weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. This weight
includes the curb weight of the vehicle,
any cargo you may carry in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
the tongue load to the GVW because
your vehicle will also be carrying that
weight.
5 52
WARNING - Trailer
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be loaded
with approximately 60% of the
total trailer load; the rear should
be loaded with approximately
40% of the total trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or trailer towing equipment. Improper
loading can result in damage to
your vehicle and/or personal
injury. Check weights and loading
at a commercial scale or highway
patrol office equipped with
scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer can
cause loss of vehicle control.
Driving your vehicle
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, to keep your
loaded vehicle weight within its design
rating capability. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
the vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's specifications and the certification label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle including
a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers,
cargo, or optional equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added to
the Base Curb Weight, including cargo
and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on each
axle (front and rear) - including vehicle
curb weight and all payload.
This is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the driver’s (or
front passenger’s) door sill.
Overloading
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the certification label.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its GAWR.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer
plus any aftermarket equipment.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual
Cargo Weight plus passengers.
WARNING - Vehicle weight
The gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) and the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label
attached to the driver's (or front
passenger’s) door. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can
calculate the weight of your load by
weighing the items (and people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
5 53
Road warning / 6-2
In case of an emergency while driving / 6-3
If the engine will not start / 6-4
Emergency starting / 6-5
If the engine overheats / 6-7
If you have a flat tire / 6-8
Towing / 6-14
Emergency commodity / 6-18
What to do in an emergency
6
What to do in an emergency
ROAD WARNING
It should be used whenever emergency
repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher
switch is located in the center console
switch panel. All turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
ORB040045
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a
warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
6 2
• The hazard warning flasher operates
whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when the
hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using the
hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
What to do in an emergency
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a crossroad
or crossing
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
• If your vehicle has a manual transaxle
not equipped with a ignition lock
switch, the vehicle can move forward
by shifting to the 2(second) or 3(third)
gear and then turning the starter without depressing the clutch pedal.
If you have a flat tire while driving
If engine stalls while driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of control. When the car has slowed to such
a speed that it is safe to do so, brake
carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park on
firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers, set
the parking brake and put the transaxle
in P (automatic transaxle) or reverse
(manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the
instruction provided later in this section.
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
6 3
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
If engine turns over normally but
does not start
1. If your vehicle has an automatic
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate the
starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start
it. See instructions for "Jump starting".
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
/OFF position, check all connectors at
the ignition coils and spark plugs.
Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek
other qualified assistance.
WARNING
If the engine will not start, do not
push or pull the vehicle to start it.
This could result in a collision or
cause other damage. In addition,
push or pull starting may cause the
catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard.
6 4
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to
yourself or damage to your vehicle or
battery, follow the jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your
vehicle.
CAUTION
1VQA4001
Connect cables in numerical order and
disconnect in reverse order.
Use only a 12-volt jumper system.
You can damage a 12-volt starting
motor, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair by
use of a 24-volt power supply (either
two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING - Battery
Never attempt to check the electrolyte level of the battery as this
may cause the battery to rupture or
explode causing serious injury.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks away
from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may
explode if exposed to flame or
sparks.
If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal
injury and damage to the vehicle
may occur! If you are not sure
how to follow this procedure,
seek
qualified
assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and
highly corrosive. When jump
starting, wear protective glasses
and be careful not to get acid on
yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
• Do not attempt to jump start the
vehicle if the discharged battery
is frozen or if the electrolyte level
is low; the battery may rupture or
explode.
6 5
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volt and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence shown in the illustration.
First connect one end of a jumper
cable to the positive terminal of the
jump start connector (1), then connect
the other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of the
other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then
the other end to the negative terminal
of the jump start connector (4). Do not
connect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is cranked.
6 6
Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery
terminals or the correct ground. Do not
lean over the battery when making
connections.
CAUTION - Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper cable
from the negative terminal of the
booster battery to the negative terminal of the discharged battery.
This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and let it run at 2,000
rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicle
should not be push-started because it
might damage the emission control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section for
jump-starting.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge forward
when the engine starts could cause
a collision with the tow vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power,
or hear loud pinging or knocking, the
engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle)
or
neutral
(manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from
the hood, stop the engine. Do not open
the hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has stopped.
If there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be sure
the engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the engine
off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive
belt is missing. If it is not missing,
check to see that it is tight. If the drive
belt seems to be satisfactory, check for
coolant leaking from the radiator,
hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal
for cold water to be draining from it
when you stop.)
WARNING
While the engine is running, keep
hair, hands and clothing away from
moving parts such as the fan and
drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken
or engine coolant is leaking out, stop
the engine immediately and call the
nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for assistance.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then,
if coolant has been lost, carefully add
coolant to the reservoir to bring the
fluid level in the reservoir up to the
halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates
there is a leak in the cooling system
and this should be checked as soon
as possible by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. This can
allow coolant to be blown out of the
opening and cause serious burns.
6 7
What to do in an emergency
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
ORB060001
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack
(2) Jack handle
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
6 8
WARNING - Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a towing service company for
assistance.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never
use the bumpers or any other
part of the vehicle for jacking
support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death.
• Do not get under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children present are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
What to do in an emergency
ORBC060002
OBH068002L
1JBA6504
Removing and storing the spare
tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flasher.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6 9
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in the vehicle that is
being jacked.
6 10
ORBC060003
1JB6025
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
What to do in an emergency
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
ORBC060004
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is stable and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To
put the wheel on the hub, pick up
the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel
onto them. If this is difficult, tip the
wheel slightly and get the top hole
in the wheel lined up with the top
stud. Then jiggle the wheel back
and forth until the wheel can be
slid over the other studs.
6 11
What to do in an emergency
WARNING
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with
the wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
10. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fingers again.
11. Lower the car to the ground by
turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
ORBC060005
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)
6 12
What to do in an emergency
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
WARNING - Inadequate
spare tire pressure
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” section 8.
6 13
What to do in an emergency
TOWING
A
B
C
dolly
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the
rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly
under the front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial tow
truck and wheel dollies are not used, the
front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
HXD03
HXD02
OMC045012
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we
recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial
tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent
damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel
dollies or flatbed is recommended.
6 14
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with the
front wheels on the ground as
this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed
equipment.
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position.
2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
■ Front
■ Front
CAUTION
Failure to place the shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.
ORB060007
ORB060006
■ Rear
Removable towing hook
(front, if equipped)
1. Open the trunk lid/tailgate, and remove
the towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the
lower part of the cover on the front
bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is fully
secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install
the cover after use.
ORBC060008
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow
truck service.
6 15
What to do in an emergency
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing hook
under the front/rear of the vehicle. Use
extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it
and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, power train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be
driven out under its own power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the
vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
6 16
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the tow
hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your
vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing
vehicles. Securely fasten the
cable or chain to the towing hook
provided.
• Before emergency towing, check that
the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and
even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do not
pull from the side or at a vertical angle.
Always pull straight ahead.
WARNING
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the
emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and
towing cable or chain may break
and cause serious injury or damage.
• If the disabled vehicle is unable
to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for
assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight ahead
as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
What to do in an emergency
OTD069011
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16
feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth
(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the
middle of the strap for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing strap
is not loosened during towing.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the ignition switch in ACC so the
steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Press the brake pedal with more force
than normal since you will have
reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be required
because the power steering system
will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill, the
brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often
and let the brakes cool off.
CAUTION - Automatic
transaxle
• If the car is being towed with all
four wheels on the ground, it can
be towed only from the front. Be
sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is
unlocked by placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and
brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to the
automatic transaxle, limit the
vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph)
and drive less than 1.5 km (1
mile) when towing.
• Before towing, check the level of
the automatic transaxle fluid. If it
is below the "HOT" range on the
dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot
add fluid, a towing dolly must be
used.
6 17
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED)
There are some emergency commodities
in the vehicle to help you respond to the
emergency situation.
Fire extinguisher
If there is small fire and you know how to
use the fire extinguisher, take the following steps carefully.
1. Pull the pin at the top of the extinguisher that keeps the handle from
being accidentally pressed.
2. Aim the nozzle toward the base of the
fire.
3. Stand approximately 2.5 m (8 ft) away
from the fire and squeeze the handle
to discharge the extinguisher. If you
release the handle, the discharge will
stop.
4. Sweep the nozzle back and forth at the
base of the fire. After the fire appears
to be out, watch it carefully since it
may re-ignite.
6 18
First aid kit
There are some items such as scissors,
bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in
the kit to give first aid to an injured person.
Triangle reflector
Place the triangle reflector on the road to
warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is
parked by the roadside due to any problems.
Tire pressure gauge
(If equipped)
Tires normally lose some air in day-today use, and you may have to add a few
pounds of air periodically and it is not
usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pressure
when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with temperature.
To check the tire pressure, take the following steps;
1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is
located on the rim of the tire.
2. Press and hold the gauge against the
tire valve. Some air will escape as you
begin and more will escape if you don't
press the gauge in firmly.
3. A firm non-leaking push will activate
the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to
know whether the tire pressure is low
or high.
5. Adjust the tire pressures to the specified pressure. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” in section 8.
6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap.
Engine compartment / 7-2
Maintenance services / 7-4
Owner maintenance / 7-6
Scheduled maintenance service / 7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-31
Engine oil / 7-34
Engine coolant / 7-36
Brake/clutch fluid / 7-39
Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-40
Washer fluid / 7-42
Parking brake / 7-42
Fuel filter / 7-43
Air cleaner / 7-44
Climate control air filter / 7-46
Wiper blades / 7-48
Battery / 7-52
Maintenance
Tires and wheels / 7-56
Fuses / 7-66
Light bulbs / 7-78
Appearance care / 7-93
Emission control system / 7-99
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gasoline Engine (Kappa 1.4L)
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Radiator cap
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Fuse box
■ Gasoline Engine (Gamma 1.4L/1.6L)
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Negative battery terminal
11. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick*
* : if equipped
ORB073070/ORB070001G
7 2
Maintenance
■ Diesel Engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
3. Radiator cap
4. Engine oil filler cap
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir
7. Air cleaner
8. Fuse box
9. Positive battery terminal
10. Negative battery terminal
11. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick*
12. Fuel filter
* : if equipped
ORB070001
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care to
prevent damage to your vehicle and
injury to yourself whenever performing
any maintenance or inspection procedures.
Should you have any doubts concerning
the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you
have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
perform this work.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine
HYUNDAI parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality
service, see an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient
servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to
vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
7 4
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsibility.
You should retain documents that show
proper maintenance has been performed
on your vehicle in accordance with the
scheduled maintenance service charts
shown on the following pages. You need
this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.
Detailed warranty information is provided
in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as a
result of improper maintenance or a lack
of required maintenance are not covered.
We recommend you have your vehicle
maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized
HYUNDAI dealer meets HYUNDAI’s high
service quality standards and receives
technical support from HYUNDAI in
order to provide you with a high level of
service satisfaction.
Owner maintenance precautions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer with special
tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance during
the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Service Passport provided with the
vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work on
a vehicle can be dangerous. You
can be seriously injured while
performing some maintenance
procedures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or the
proper tools and equipment to do
the work, have it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Working under the hood with the
engine running is dangerous. It
becomes even more dangerous
when you wear jewelry or loose
clothing. These can become
entangled in moving parts and
result in injury. Therefore, if you
must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches,
and necklaces) and all neckties,
scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the
engine or cooling fans.
Engine compartment precautions
(Diesel engine)
• Follow the safety tips provided below,
when you are checking the engine
room while the engine is running.
- Do not touch the injector, injector
wirings, and the engine computer
while the engine is running.
- Do not remove the injector connector
while the engine is running.
- People using pacemakers must not
go near the engine while the engine
is starting or running.
WARNING - Diesel Engine
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High-pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high-pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touches the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
electronic engine control system
produce considerable magnetic
fields.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks and
inspections that should be performed by
the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer at the frequencies indicated to
help ensure safe, dependable operation
of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as
soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks are
generally not covered by warranties and
you may be charged for labor, parts and
lubricants used.
7 6
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
WARNING
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause burns
or other serious injury.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of the
exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes
in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steering
effort or looseness in the steering
wheel, or change in its straight-ahead
position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns
slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
• When stopping, listen and check for
unusual sounds, pulling to one side,
increased brake pedal travel or “hardto-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check
the transaxle fluid level.
• Check manual transaxle operation,
including clutch operation.
• Check automatic transaxle P (Park)
function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle
(water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
Maintenance
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray and
wiper operation. Clean wiper blades
with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes, shields
and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear
and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose wheel
lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks, and
hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weatherstrips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake (and clutch) fluid
level.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule if
the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply. If
any of the following conditions apply, follow Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy
areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in cold
temperatures and/or extremely humid
climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above 32°C
(90°F).
7 8
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than the
following Normal Maintenance Schedule.
After the periods or distance shown in
the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE)
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive
belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary
correct or replace.
*2 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*3 : Driving in summer season temperature over 40 °C (104 °F
- SAUDI, UAE, OMAN, KUWAIT, BAHRAIN, QATAR, IRAN,
YEMEN ETC) or driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h) must
conform the severe driving condition.
*4 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*5 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration
and adjust if necessary. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer
should perform the operation.
*6 : The fuel filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power,
hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*7 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*8 : If good quality gasolines that meet Europe Fuel standards
(EN228) or equivalents including fuel additives is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are
available from your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
7 9
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
(Continued)
7 10
(Continued)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *6 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Leaded Fuel)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
(Continued)
7 11
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
7 12
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *6 - For Europe
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter *6 - Except Europe
❑ Replace spark plugs (Leaded Fuel)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Unleaded Fuel)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
(Continued)
7 13
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
75,000 km (50,000 miles) or 60 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
7 14
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *6 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Leaded Fuel)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - For Europe
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Inspect valve clearance (Gamma 1.4L/1.6L) *5
(Every 95,000 km (60,000 miles) or 48 months *4)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
(Continued)
7 15
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 84 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
7 16
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (GASOLINE ENGINE) (CONT.)
120,000 km (80,000 miles) or 96 months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except China, India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - Except Europe
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter *6 - For Europe
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For China, India, Middle East
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2
- Except Middle East
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter *2 *3
- For Middle East
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace fuel filter *6 - Except Europe
❑ Replace spark plugs (Leaded Fuel)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Unleaded Fuel)
❑ Replace coolant *7
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months *4)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *1 - For Europe
(At first, 90,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months )
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - For Europe
❑ Add fuel additives *8 - Except Europe
(Every 5,000 km or 6months)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace
(Continued)
7 17
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS (GASOLINE ENGINE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
Maintenance
operation
Except Middle
East
R
For Middle East
R
Maintenance intervals
Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or
6 months
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Air cleaner filter
R
Spark plugs
R
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
7 18
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Driving condition
A, B, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J, K, L
C, E
A, B, H, I, K
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
C, D, E, F, G
C, D, E, F, G
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
Maintenance intervals
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Driving condition
C, D, E, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
C, E
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
L : Driving in very cold weather
7 19
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE)
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all
vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350
miles) or before starting a long trip.
*2 : The engine oil level should be checked regularly and maintained properly. Operating with an insufficient amount of oil
can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered
by warranty.
*3 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc., replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.
*4 : This maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. It is
applicable only when using a qualified fuel <"EN590 or
equivalent">. If the diesel fuel specifications don't meet the
EN590, it must be replaced more frequently. HYUNDAI recommends "every 7,500km inspection, every 15,000km
replacement". If there are some important safety matters like
fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting
problem etc., replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of
maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for details.
7 20
*5 : Manual transaxle should be changed anytime they have
been submerged in water.
*6 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft
water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can
result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
*7 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval
when you do maintenance of other items.
*8 : Inspect and if necessary correct or replace. Inspect drive
belt tensioner, idler and alternator pulley and if necessary
correct or replace.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - DIESEL ENGINE (CONT.)
20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12month
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 21
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 24months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - Except Europe
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - For Europe
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
7 22
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 36months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *5
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 23
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid - Except Europe
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *8
(At first, 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
7 24
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - For Europe
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
100,000 km (62,500 miles) or 60months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *8
(At first, 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 25
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 72months
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - Except Europe
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) *5
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *8
(At first, 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
7 26
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - For Europe
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Replace fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
140,000 km (87,500 miles) or 84months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *8
(At first, 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(Continued)
7 27
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (DIESEL ENGINE) (CONT.)
160,000 km (100,000 miles) or 96months
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter - Except India, Middle East
❑ Inspect air conditioner refrigerant/compressor (if equipped)
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - Except Europe
❑ Inspect disc brakes and pads
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust system
❑ Inspect front suspension ball joints
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - Except Europe *4
❑ Inspect fuel filter cartridge - For Europe *3
❑ Inspect fuel lines, hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect steering gear rack, linkage and boots
❑ Inspect tire (pressure & tread wear)
❑ Inspect cooling system
(At first, 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Inspect drive belt *8
(At first, 80,000 km (50,000 miles) or 48months
after that, every 20,000 km (12,500 miles) or 12months)
(Continued)
7 28
(Continued)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter - For India, Middle East
(Every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace brake/clutch(if equipped) fluid - For Europe
❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - Except Europe *1 *2
(Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - For Europe *1 *2
❑ Replace coolant *6
(At first, 210,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120months
after that, every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24months *7)
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS (DIESEL ENGINE)
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars mainly used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace
Maintenance item
Engine oil and
engine oil filter
Maintenance
operation
Except Europe
R
For Europe
R
Maintenance intervals
Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or
6 months
Every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or
6 months
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Air cleaner filter
R
Manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 120,000 km (80,000 miles)
Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
R
Every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots
I
Front suspension ball joints
I
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Driving condition
A, B, C, F, G,
H, I, J, K, L
C, E
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
C, D, E, F, G
C, D, E, F, G
7 29
Maintenance
Maintenance item
Maintenance
operation
Disc brakes and pads, calipers and rotors
I
Parking brake
I
Driveshaft and boots
I
Climate control air filter (if equipped)
R
Severe driving conditions
A : Repeated short distance driving
B : Extensive idling
C : Driving in dusty, rough roads
D : Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive
materials or in very cold weather
E : Driving in sandy areas
F : More than 50 % driving in heavy city traffic during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F)
7 30
Maintenance intervals
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Inspect more frequently
depending on the condition
Replace more frequently
depending on the condition
Driving condition
C, D, E, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F,
G, H, I, J
C, E
G : Driving in mountainous areas.
H : Towing a trailer
I : Driving for patrol car, taxi, commercial car or vehicle towing
J : Driving over 170 km/h (106 mile/h)
K : Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
L : Driving in very cold weather
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
Fuel filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven, damage
the emission system and cause multiple
issues such as hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks
at the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive
belts should be checked periodically for
proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace
any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
WARNING - Diesel only
Never work on injection system
with engine running or within 30
seconds after shutting off engine.
High pressure pump, rail, injectors
and high pressure pipes are subject to high pressure even after the
engine stopped. The fuel jet produced by fuel leaks may cause serious injury, if it touch the body.
People using pacemakers should
not move than 30cm closer to the
ECU or wiring harness within the
engine room while engine is running, since the high currents in the
Common Rail system produce considerable magnetic fields.
7 31
Maintenance
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
Air cleaner filter
Coolant
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified
in the maintenance schedule. Make sure
that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is
correctly replaced.
A Genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)
Manual transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention
should be paid to examine those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources,
such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that
the hoses do not come in contact with
any heat source, sharp edges or moving
component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and
that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
7 32
Make sure to install new spark plugs of
the correct heat range.
Valve clearance
(Gasoline - Gamma 1.4L/1.6L)
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary.
An authorized HYUNDAI dealer should
perform the operation.
Cooling system
Check cooling system components, such
as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and
connections for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
according to the maintenance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
(if equipped)
The fluid level should be in the "HOT"
range of the dipstick, after the engine
and transaxle are at normal operating
temperature. Check the automatic
transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the
parking brake properly applied.
Maintenance
Brake hoses and lines
Suspension mounting bolts
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
“MIN” and “MAX” marks on the side of
the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4
specification.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.
Parking brake
Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and
rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
For more information on checking the
pads or lining wear limit, refer to the
Hyundai web site.
(http://brakemanual.hmc.co.kr)
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
(if equipped)
Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
7 33
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check
the level. The level should be between
F and L.
CAUTION
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when adding
or changing engine oil. If you drop
the engine oil on the engine room,
wipe it off immediately.
ORBC070003
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach
normal operating temperature.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few
minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to
return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and
re-insert it fully.
WARNING - Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may be
hot enough to burn you.
7 34
ORB070004
CAUTION - Diesel engine
Overfilling the engine oil may cause
severe dieseling due to churning
effect. It may lead to engine damage
accompanied with abrupt engine
speed increment, combustion noise
and white smoke emission.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring
the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from
being spilled on engine components.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this section.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged
periods of time. Used engine oil
contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used oil.
7 35
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system has a
reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze
coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at the
beginning of the winter season, and
before traveling to a colder climate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Removing radiator
cap
• Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead
to cooling system and engine
damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait until
it cools down. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it, and
turn it counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the cap,
using a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
7 36
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator
cap or the drain plug while the
engine and radiator are hot. Hot
coolant and steam may still blow
out under pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING
The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by
engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed.
It may sometimes operate even
when the engine is not running.
Use extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling fan
so that you are not injured by a
rotating fan blades. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the
electric motor will automatically
shut off. This is a normal condition.
Maintenance
■ Gasoline Engine
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent
additions are required, see an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system
inspection.
■ Gasoline Engine
ORB070005
■ Diesel Engine
ORB070067
To add coolant follow the below steps:
(Gasoline Engine only)
1. Open the cap.
2. Pull the sliding neck up and turn it in
the direction of the arrow to fix it in
place.
3. Add coolant.
ORB070066
Check the condition and connections of
all cooling system hoses and heater
hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side of the
coolant reservoir when the engine is
cool.
7 37
Maintenance
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle
and never mix hard water in the
coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious
malfunction or engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol-based
coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified
coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less than
35% antifreeze, which would reduce
the effectiveness of the solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
Ambient
Temperature
-15°C (5°F)
-25°C (-13°F)
-35°C (-31°F)
-45°C (-49°F)
7 38
Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60
Water
65
60
50
40
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the beginning
of this section.
CAUTION
ORBC072006
Put a thick cloth around the radiator
cap before refilling the coolant in
order to prevent the coolant from
overflowing into engine parts such
as the generator.
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding hot coolant and
steam may blow out under pressure causing serious injury.
WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID
Use only the specified brake fluid. (Refer
to “Recommended lubricants or capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING - Loss of brake
fluid
ORBC070007
Checking the brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap and
adding brake fluid, clean the area around
the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent
brake fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX
level. The level will fall with accumulated
mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings.
If the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake or clutch system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of fluid,
the vehicle should be inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Brake fluid
When changing and adding brake
fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it
come in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid should come in contact
with your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of fresh
tap water. Have your eyes examined
by a doctor as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Do not allow brake fluid to contact
the vehicle's body paint, as paint
damage will result. Brake fluid,
which has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should never
be used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed
of properly. Don't put in the wrong
kind of fluid. A few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
7 39
Maintenance
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)
2. After the transaxle is warmed up sufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C
(158~176°F), for example by 10 minutes usual driving, move the shift lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P
(Park)” position.
ORB073008
Checking the automatic transaxle
fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following procedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is running at normal idle speed.
7 40
OHD076045N
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold condition (fluid temperature 20~30°C
(68~86°F) add the fluid to “C” (COLD)
line and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
Maintenance
WARNING - Transaxle fluid
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This
means that the engine, radiator,
radiator hose and exhaust system
etc., are very hot. Exercise great
care not to burn yourself during
this procedure.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level can cause poor
shifting gear. Overfilling can cause
foaming, loss of fluid and transaxle
malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of the
vehicle, apply parking brake and
depress the brake pedal before
moving the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
“C” (COLD) range is for reference only
and should NOT be used to determine
transaxle fluid level.
✽ NOTICE
New automatic transaxle fluid should be
red. The red dye is added so the assembly plant can identify it as automatic
transaxle fluid and distinguish it from
engine oil or antifreeze. The red dye,
which is not an indicator of fluid quality, is not permanent. As the vehicle is
driven, the automatic transaxle fluid
will begin to look darker. The color may
eventually appear light brown.
Therefore,
have
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer change the automatic
transaxle fluid according to the
Scheduled Maintenance at the beginning of this section.
Use only the specified automatic
transaxle fluid. (Refer to “Recommended
lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)
Changing the automatic transaxle
fluid
Have automatic transaxle fluid changed
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance Schedule
at the beginning of this section.
7 41
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING - Coolant
ORBC070009
Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you
can check the level with a quick visual
inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain
water may be used if washer fluid is not
available. However, use washer solvent
with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may cause
loss of vehicle control or damage
to paint and body trim.
• Windshield Washer fluid agents
contain some amounts of alcohol
and can be flammable under certain circumstances. Do not allow
sparks or flame to contact the
washer fluid or the washer fluid
reservoir. Damage to the vehicle
or occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
Do not drink and avoid contacting
windshield washer fluid. Serious
injury or death could occur.
ORB050003
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by
counting the number of “clicks’’ heard
while fully applying it from the released
position. Also, the parking brake alone
should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or
less than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 5 “clicks’’ at a force of
20 kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
7 42
Maintenance
FUEL FILTER (FOR DIESEL)
Draining water from the fuel filter
✽ NOTICE
The fuel filter for diesel engine plays an
important role of separating water from
fuel and accumulating the water in its
bottom.
If water accumulates in the fuel filter, the
warning light comes on when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
If this warning light illuminates,
take your car to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have
drain the water and checked
the system.
• Use cloths when you extract air so that
the fuel is not sprayed around.
• Clean the fuel around the fuel filter or
the injection pump before starting the
engine to prevent fire.
• Finally, check each part if the fuel is
leaking.
Fuel filter cartridge replacement
✽ NOTICE
ORB073063
Extracting air from the fuel filter
CAUTION
If the water accumulated in the fuel
filter is not drained at proper times,
damages to the major parts such as
the fuel system can be caused by
water permeation in the fuel filter.
When replacing the fuel filter cartridge,
use HYUNDAI genuine parts.
If you drive until you have no fuel left or if
you replace the fuel filter, be sure to
extract air from the fuel system as it
makes it difficult to start the engine.
1. Pump up and down(1) approximately
50 times until the pump is hard.
2. Extract air from the fuel filter by removing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
3. Pump up and down(1) approximately
15 times.
4. Extract air from the fuel filter by removing the bolt(2) with a cross-tip screw
driver and reinstall the bolt(2).
5. Pump up and down(1) approximately 5
times.
7 43
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
ORB073010
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and
should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspecting
the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed air.
7 44
ORB073011
ORB070012
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching
clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
3. Replace the air cleaner filter.
4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching
clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage conditions” in this section.)
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use a HYUNDAI genuine part. Use
of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor or turbochager.
7 45
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long period, it should be
inspected more frequently and replaced
earlier. When you, the owner, replace the
climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be
careful to avoid damaging other components.
Replace the filter according to the maintenance Schedule.
ORB070060
Filter replacement
1. Open the glove box and remove the
support strap (1).
7 46
ORB070013
2. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers by turning them counterclockwise on both sides.
Maintenance
ORB070014
OYF079046
3. Remove the climate control air filter
cover while pressing the lock of the
cover.
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it properly. Otherwise, the
system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
7 47
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Contamination of either the windshield or
the wiper blades with foreign matter can
reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot
wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and
the blades with a good cleaner or mild
detergent, and rinse thoroughly with
clean water.
1JBA5122
Blade inspection
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to
make the windshield difficult to clean.
7 48
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or
cracked, and require replacement.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
OLM079200
OLM079201
OLM079202
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper
blade assembly to expose the plastic
locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the blade
assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
7 49
Maintenance
OHM078059
Front windshield wiper blade
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall
against the windshield, since it may
chip or crack the windshield.
7 50
OYF079061
OYF079062
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull
down the blade assembly and remove
it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
Maintenance
OHM078062
OHM078063
Rear window wiper blade
(if equipped)
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the
wiper blade assembly.
2. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the slot in
the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or
other components, have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper
blade.
7 51
Maintenance
BATTERY
✽ NOTICE
ORB073016
For best battery service
• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections
clean, tight, and coated with petroleum
jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the
battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be used for
an extended time, disconnect the battery cables.
Basically equipped battery is maintenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked with
LOWER and UPPER on the side, you
can check the electrolyte level. The electrolyte level should be between LOWER
and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is
low, it needs to add distilled (demineralized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or
other electrolyte). When refill, be careful not to splash the battery and adjacent components. And do not overfill the
battery cells. It can cause corrosion on
other parts. After then ensure that tighten the cell caps. We recommend that you
contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the following
instructions carefully when
handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and
all other flames or sparks
away from the battery.
Hydrogen, a highly combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children because
batteries contain highly
corrosive SULFURIC ACID.
Do not allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into
your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least
15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
If electrolyte gets on your
skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area.
(Continued)
7 52
Maintenance
(Continued)
If you feel a pain or a burning sensation, get medical
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a
battery. Always provide
ventilation when working in
an enclosed space.
Pb
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the
battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
• When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
case may cause battery acid to
leak, resulting in personal injury.
Lift with a battery carrier or with
your hands on opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with the
engine running or the ignition
switched on.
Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily
injury or death.
CAUTION
• When you don’t use the vehicle
for a long time in the low temperature area, separate the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully to
prevent the battery case damaged in low temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized electronic devices to the battery, the
battery may be discharged. Never
use unauthorized devices.
• Make sure the battery cap is
closed. If the battery cap is not
closed securely, it can malfunction because the electric components are exposed to moisture.
WARNING
Separating the battery from the
vehicle should be done in an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7 53
Maintenance
■ Example
Battery recharging
OJD072039
❈ The actual battery label in the vehicle
may differ from the illustration.
Battery capacity label
1. CMF60L-BCI : The HYUNDAI model
name of battery
2. 12V : The nominal voltage
3. 60Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity
(in Ampere hours)
4. 92RC : The nominal reserve capacity
(in min.)
5. 550CCA : The cold-test current in
amperes by SAE
6. 440A : The cold-test current in
amperes by EN
7 54
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged in a
short time (because, for example, the
headlights or interior lights were left on
while the vehicle was not in use),
recharge it by slow charging (trickle)
for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while the
vehicle is being used, recharge it at 2030A for two hours.
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precautions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in an
area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,
or flame near the battery.
• Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin
gassing (boiling) violently or if
the temperature of the electrolyte
of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).
• Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
Maintenance
Reset items
WARNING
• Before performing maintenance
or recharging the battery, turn off
all accessories and stop the
engine.
• The negative battery cable must
be removed first and installed
last when the battery is disconnected.
• Operation related to the battery
should be done in an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
Items should be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the battery has
been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window (See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
CAUTION
• Keep the battery away from water
or any liquid.
• For your safety, use the authenticity by approved authorized
HYUNDAI dealer, when you
replace the battery.
7 55
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 56
CAUTION
ORB070017
All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
WARNING - Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
7 57
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
7 58
WARNING
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents,
injuries, and even death. The
recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be
found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar.
• Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire.
HYUNDAI recommends that
you check the spare every
time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recommended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
With a full-size spare tire (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only from
front to rear and not from right to
left.
S2BLA790
Without a spare tire
WARNING
S2BLA790A
Directional tires (if equipped)
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
Wheel alignment and tire balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only
approved wheel weights.
CBGQ0707A
7 59
Maintenance
WARNING - Replacing
Tread wear indicator
OEN076053
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.
7 60
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and traction.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capability. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to handling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that
is not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESP (Electronic Stability
Program) (if equipped) to
work irregularly.
Maintenance
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow
chain
clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
1
5,6
7
4
2
3
1
I030B04JM
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 61
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation
Wheel size designation
Tire speed ratings
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
195/50R16 83H
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe operating speed.
195 - Tire width in millimeters.
50 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
83 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
7 62
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX16
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
Z
Maximum Speed
180 km/h (112 mph)
190 km/h (118 mph)
210 km/h (130 mph)
240 km/h (149 mph)
Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1613 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2013.
4. Tire ply composition and material
WARNING - Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an accident involving serious injury or
death.
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
7 63
Maintenance
6. Maximum load rating
Tread wear
Traction - AA, A, B & C
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
7 64
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires.
CAUTION
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- If the tire is impacted, we recommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the tire
damage with your own eyes,
have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
7 65
Maintenance
FUSES
Blade type
Normal
Blown
Cartridge type
Normal
Blown
Multi fuse
Normal
Blown
ORB072110
A vehicle’s electrical system is protected
from electrical overload damage by
fuses.
7 66
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bolster,
another is in the engine compartment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the
appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has
blown, the element inside the fuse will be
melted.
If the electrical system does not work,
first check the driver’s side fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, disconnect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with one of
the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using
the system involved and immediately
consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type, cartridge type and multi fuse.
WARNING - Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or aluminum
foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may
cause extensive wiring damage
and a possible fire.
CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove fuses
because it may cause a short circuit
and damage the system.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label may
differ from equipped items.
Maintenance
Driver’s side panel
CAUTION
• When replacing a blown fuse or
relay with a new one, make sure
the new fuse or relay fits tightly
into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause
the vehicle wiring and electric
systems damage and a possible
fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays and
terminals fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuses, relays and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause a possible
fire. If fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult with an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.
ORB070018
Instrument panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
ORB070019
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.
Use the removal tool provided in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of
the same rating from a circuit you may
not need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are
OK, check the fuse panel in the engine
compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must
be replaced.
7 67
Maintenance
CAUTION
• Do not pull up the memory fuse
and always place the memory
fuse in the original position while
driving the vehicle.
• Do not pull up the memory fuse
repeatedly. The memory fuse may
be worn out.
✽ NOTICE
ORB070020
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a memory
fuse to prevent battery discharge if your
vehicle is parked without being operated
for prolonged periods. Use the following
procedures before parking the vehicle for
prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.
3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and
pull up the memory fuse.
7 68
• If the memory fuse is pulled up from
the fuse panel, the warning chime,
audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,
will not operate. Some items must be
reset after replacement. Refer to
“Battery” in this section.
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be discharged by operation of the headlights or other electrical devices.
• If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, pull up the memory fuse to
prevent the battery being discharged.
ORB070021
■ Diesel only
ORB070062
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other
switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
Maintenance
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it
is blown. To remove or insert the fuse,
use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,
and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in the
engine compartment, securely
install the fuse panel cover. If not,
electrical failures may occur from
water contact.
ORB070022
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, replace the fuse
with a new one of the same rating when
the ignition switch and all other switches
are off.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or assemble
the multi fuse fastened with bolts or
nuts. The fuse may be fastened
incompletely, and it may cause a
possible fire. If the multi fuse is
blown, we recommend that you
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
7 69
Maintenance
Driver’s side panel
ORB070023
Fuse/relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing
fuse/relay name and capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing.
When you inspect the fuse panel in your
vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
ORB073074L
7 70
Maintenance
Engine compartment
ORB070024
ORB073075L
7 71
Maintenance
Diesel only
ORB070061
ORB073076
7 72
Maintenance
Instrument panel (Driver’s side fuse panel)
Description
Symbol
Fuse rating
Protected component
POWER OUTLET
15A
Power Outlet
C/LIGHTER
15A
Cigarette Lighter
ACC
10A
Audio, BCM, Smart Key Control Module, ATM Shift Lock Control Module
A/BAG IND
10A
Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
A/BAG
10A
SRS Control Module
T/SIG
10A
Hazard Switch
MDPS
10A
EPS Control Module
15A
Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor
15A
-
FOG LAMP RR
10A
Rear Fog Lamp Relay
FOG LAMP FRT
10A
Front Fog Lamp Relay
DRL
10A
Dedicated DRL
15A
Stop Lamp Switch, Battery Sensor, Stop Lamp Relay, Smart Key Control Module, Data Link
Connector, ATM Shift Lever Switch, Key Lock Solenoid
10A
Instrument Cluster, BCM
WIPER RR
SPARE
3
STOP LAMP
CLUSTER
SPARE
3
STOP
LAMP
7 73
Maintenance
Description
Symbol
Fuse rating
Protected component
IG1
IG1
10A
ATM Shift Lock Control Module, EPS Control Module, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module,
Electro Chromic Mirror, SBR Control Module, Seat Belt Reminder Indicator, Rear Parking
Assist Buzzer, Stop Lamp Switch(Gasoline), Rheostat, Fuel Filter Warning Sensor (Diesel),
Rear Parking Assist Sensor Side LH/RH, Rear Parking Assist Sensor Center LH/RH
10A
ABS Control Module, ESP Control Module, ESP Off Switch, E/R Fuse & Relay Box
(Multipurpose Check Connector)
10A
Back-Up Lamp Switch
10A
ECM, Mass Air Flow Sensor (Diesel), Smart Key Control Module
10A
-
HAZARD
15A
Hazard Relay, Hazard Switch
PDM
25A
Smart Key Control Module
SUNROOF
15A
Sunroof Motor
PDM
10A
Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch
TCU
15A
TCM (Diesel), Pulse Generator 'A'/'B', Vehicle Speed Sensor, Transaxle Range Switch
SPARE
15A
-
IG2
10A
BCM, Power Window Relay, Smart Key Control Module, A/C Control Module, Instrument
Cluster, Sunroof Motor, Head Lamp Leveling Device Switch, Head Lamp LH/RH
WIPER FRT
25A
Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor
DR LOCK
20A
Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Tail Gate Unlock Relay, Driver Door Lock Actuator
ABS
B/UP
LAMP
B/UP LAMP
ECU
SPARE
4
SPARE
4
1
2
SPARE
5
IG2
7 74
5
Maintenance
Description
Symbol
SAFETY POWER
WINDOW
Fuse rating
Protected component
25A
Driver Safety Power Window Module
15A
10A
-
ROOM LAMP
10A
Instrument Cluster, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, BCM, A/C Control Module, Luggage
Lamp, Front Room Lamp
AUDIO
20A
Audio
TAIL LAMP LH
10A
Rear Combination Lamp LH, Head Lamp LH, License Lamp LH/RH (4DOOR), License
Lamp (5DOOR)
TAIL LAMP RH
10A
Head Lamp RH, Rear Combination Lamp RH, Rheostat, Head Lamp Leveling Device
Switch, Hazard Switch, Audio, AUX & USB Jack, ESP Off Switch, Instrument Cluster,
Multifunction Switch (Remote Control), A/C Switch, Rear Defogger Switch, A/C Control
Module, Front Wiper Deicer Switch, ATM Shift Lever Switch ILL.
START
10A
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (RLY. 7), ECM, Ignition Lock Switch, Transaxle Range Switch
H/LAMP
10A
Instrument Cluster, Engine Compartment Fuse & Relay Box (Head Lamp Relay)
P/WDW LH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH
P/WDW RH
25A
Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH, Passenger Power Window
Switch
HTD MIRR
10A
ECM (Gasoline), Rear Defogger Switch, Driver/ Passenger Power Outside Mirror
A/CON
10A
A/C Control Module (Auto)
BLOWER
10A
ECM, Blower Switch, Blower Resistor
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
2
2
1
1
7 75
Maintenance
Engine compartment main fuse panel
Description
Symbol
MULTI FUSE
ALT (GSL)
ALT (DSL)
FUSE
F/PUMP
(GSL)
7 76
Fuse rating
Protected component
80A
EPS Control Module
40A
RLY.10 (Blower Relay)
40A
I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)
40A
ABS Control Module, ESP Control Module
40A
ABS Control Module, ESP Control Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
125A (GSL)
150A (DSL)
Alternator, Diesel Box (GLOW 80A, PTC 1/2/3 50A),
E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Multi Fuse F1~F5, Fuse F20)
30A
Diesel : RLY.12 (Fuel Filter Heater Relay)
50A
I/P Junction Box (Power Connector Fuse : F35/F36, Fuse : F12~F15, Tail Lamp Relay)
40A
40A
RLY.7 (Start Relay), Ignition Switch
Ignition Switch
30A
RLY.1 (Engine Control Relay), Fuse F25
40A
RLY.3 (Cooling Fan (Low) Relay), RLY.8 (Cooling Fan (High) Relay)
50A
I/P Junction Box (Relay : Power Window, Hazard, Door Lock/Unlock, Tail Gate Unlock,
Fuse : F23~F25, F31, F32)
10A
RLY.5 (Horn Relay)
15A
Gasoline: RLY.2 (Fuel Pump Relay)
10A
Head Lamp RH
Maintenance
Description
Symbol
Fuse rating
10A
Head Lamp LH
10A
RLY.4 (A/C Relay)
10A
Engine Compartment Fuse&Relay Box (Head Lamp Relay)
20A
Diesel : ECM
15A
Gasoline : ECM, TCM, Injector #1~#4, Oil Control Valve, RLY.12 (Fuel Pump Relay)
Diesel : Diesel Box (Glow Relay, PTC Heater Relay #1), VGT Actuator, Camshaft Position
Sensor, Electrical EGR Actuator, Immobilizer Module
10A
Gasoline : ECM, Camshaft Position Sensor, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oxygen Sensor
(Up/Down), Immobilizer Module, RLY.3 (Cooling Fan (Low) Relay), RLY.4 (A/C Relay),
RLY.8 (Cooling Fan (High) Relay)
Diesel : Stop Lamp Switch, Lambda Sensor, RLY.3 (Cooling Fan (Low) Relay), RLY.4 (A/C Relay),
RLY.8 (Cooling Fan (High) Relay)
10A
TCM
FUSE
15A/10A
B/UP LAMP
Protected component
Diesel : Fuel Pressure Regulator Valve
10A
TCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Instrument Cluster, BCM, Rear Combination Lamp LH/RH
10A
Diesel : ECM, Multifunction Switch (Wiper), Front Wiper Motor
Engine compartment sub fuse panel (Diesel Engine)
Description
Fuse rating
GLOW
PTC1
PTC2
PTC 3
80A
50A
50A
50A
Protected component
Glow relay
PTC heater relay #1
PTC heater relay #2
PTC heater relay #3
7 77
Maintenance
LIGHT BULBS
WARNING - Working on
the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly
apply the parking brake, ensure
that the ignition switch is turned to
the LOCK position and turn off the
lights to avoid sudden movement
of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
CAUTION
Be sure to replace the burned-out
bulb with one of the same wattage
rating. Otherwise, it may cause
damage to the fuse or electric
wiring system.
7 78
CAUTION
• If you don’t have necessary tools,
the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer. In many cases, it
is difficult to replace vehicle light
bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before
you can get to the bulb. This is
especially true if you have to
remove the headlight assembly to
get to the bulb(s). Removing/
installing the headlight assembly
can result in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not install additional bulb or
LED. If you install that, the lamp
may not be operated properly and
fuse box or electric wiring system
may have problem.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused by
the temperature difference between the
lamp inside and outside. This is similar
to the condensation on your windows
inside your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with your
vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Maintenance
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
ORB070025
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
ORB073025
Headlight, position light, turn signal light, front fog light bulb
replacement
(1) Headlight (High/Low)
(2) Position light
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front fog light (if equipped)
ORBC070048
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
5. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly.
6. Install a new headlight bulb and snap
the headlight bulb retaining wire into
position by aligning the wire with the
groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
8. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
✽ NOTICE
We recommend that the headlight aiming be adjusted after an accident or
after the headlight assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
ORB073048
Headlight
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlight bulb socketconnector.
4. Unsnap the headlight bulb retaining
wire by depressing the end and pushing it upward.
7 79
Maintenance
■ Headlamp (Low beam)
ORB073078
■ Headlamp (High beam)
❈ Traffic Change (MFR Headlamp) (For
Europe) - for RHD (Right-Hand Drive)
vehicle
The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with
opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric
part will dazzle oncoming car driver. To
prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive tape, down
aiming). These headlamps are designed
to be masked with adhesive tape according to below picture.
60mm
10mm
30mm
ORB073079
✽ NOTICE - Bi-Function
Projection Headlamp
This headlamp is bi-function type that
switches the low beam to high or the
high beam to low to use solenoid system.
So, the moving sound may be heard
when the headlamp switches the low
beam to high or the high beam to low
and these it does not indicate malfunction of the headlamp.
Right side
60mm
10mm
30mm
Left side
ORBR070101
7 80
❈ Traffic Change
(Bi-Function Projection Headlamp)
The low beam light distribution is asymmetric.
If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direction, this asymmetric part
will dazzle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand
several technical solutions (ex. automatic
change system, adhesive sheet, down
aiming). This headlamps are designed
not to dazzle opposite drivers. So, you
need not change your headlamps in a
country with opposite traffic direction.
Maintenance
Position light
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlight bulb cover by
turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the socket by pulling it
straight out.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Install the socket.
7. Install the headlight bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
OHD076046
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
(Continued)
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids. Never touch
the glass with bare hands.
Residual oil may cause the bulb
to overheat and burst when lit. A
bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlight.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool
down before handling it.
ORB073072
WARNING - Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying
pieces of glass if broken.
(Continued)
7 81
Maintenance
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
ORBC070049
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
5. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
ORBC070030
ORB073049
ORBC070031
Turn signal light
1. Turn off the engine and open the hood.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
Front fog light bulbs (if equipped)
1. Remove the front bumper under cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of the
front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector from
the socket.
7 82
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket counter
clockwise until the tabs on the socket
align with the slots on the housing.
5. Install the new bulb-socket into the
housing by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots in the housing.
Push the socket into the housing and
turn the socket clockwise.
6. Connect the power connector to the
socket.
7. Reinstall the front bumper under cover.
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
ORB073077R
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
2. The vehicle should be placed on a flat
floor.
3. Draw vertical lines (Vertical lines passing through respective head lamp centers) and a horizontal line (Horizontal
line passing through center of head
lamps) on the screen.
4. With the head lamp and battery in normal condition, aim the head lamps so
the brightest portion falls on the horizontal and vertical lines.
5. To aim the low beam left or right, turn
the driver (1) clockwise or counterclockwise. To aim the low beam up or
down, turn the driver (2) clockwise or
counterclockwise.
ORB073073
Headlight aiming
1. Inflate the tires to the specified pressure and remove any loads from the
vehicle except the driver, spare tire,
and tools.
7 83
Maintenance
Aiming point
<Ground Height>
<Distance between lamps>
H1 : Height between the head lamp bulb center and ground
W1 : Distance between the two head lamp bulbs centers
■ MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
■ Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
Unit: mm (in.)
7 84
Unit: mm (in.)
Vehicle condition
H1
W1
Vehicle condition
H1
W1
Without driver
With driver
708 (27.8)
701 (27.5)
1,348 (53.0)
Without driver
With driver
698 (27.4)
691 (27.2)
1,354 (53.3)
Maintenance
OMD051054L
Head lamp low beam (Left-hand drive type)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
7 85
Maintenance
OMD051055L
Head lamp low beam (Right-hand drive type)
1. Turn the low beam on without driver aboard.
2. The cut-off line should be projected in the cut-off line shown in the picture.
3. When aiming the low beam, vertical aiming should be adjusted after adjusting the horizontal aiming.
4. If head lamp leveling device is equipped, adjust the head lamp leveling device switch with 0 positions.
7 86
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket.
6. Reassemble the socket and the lens
part.
7. Connect the bulb electrical connector.
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
ORB070068
Side repeater light bulb replacement (if equipped)
Type A
1. Remove the light assembly from the
vehicle by prying the lens and pulling
the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical connector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens parts
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the lens part.
ORB070054
Type B
If the light bulb does not operate, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
7 87
Maintenance
ORBC070033
Rear combination light bulb
replacement (4 Door)
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Rear fog light (Left side) (if equipped)
(4) Back-up light (Right side)
7 88
ORBC070034
ORBC070051
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the service cover by pulling
out the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it
into the service hole.
Maintenance
ORB071056
ORB071058
ORB071033
Rear combination light bulb
replacement (5 Door)
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Stop light or rear fog light
(if equipped)
ORB071057
1. Open the tailgate.
2. Loosen the light assembly retaining
screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
3. Remove the rear combination light
assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the socket from the assembly
by turning the socket counterclockwise
until the tabs on the socket align with
the slots on the assembly.
5. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb
align with the slots in the socket. Pull
the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into
the socket and rotating it until it locks
into place.
7. Install the socket in the assembly by
aligning the tabs on the socket with the
slots in the assembly. Push the socket
into the assembly and turn the socket
clockwise.
7 89
Maintenance
8. Reinstall the light assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
9. Tighten the screws.
ORBC070043
ORB071043
5 Door
If the light is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
ORBC070036
High mounted stop light bulb
replacement (if equipped)
4 Door
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Replace the bulb from the socket.
4. Install the socket by turning it clockwise.
7 90
Maintenance
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Install the socket by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the trunk trim.
ORBC070041
ORB071055
ORBC070042
License plate light bulb replacement
4 Door
1. Remove the trunk trim.
2. Remove the socket by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
5 Door
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, remove
the light assembly from the vehicle by
prying the lens gently.
2. Remove the socket from the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
4. Install a new bulb in the socket and
install the socket to the lens.
5. Reinstall the lens securely.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
7 91
Maintenance
Front map lamp
WARNING
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning
your fingers or receiving an electric
shock.
ORB070065
Room lamp
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
5. If the map lamp and room lamp are not
operating, have the vehicle checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
CAUTION
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.
ORB070064
Interior light bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently
pry the lens from the interior light
housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.
7 92
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning and
caution statements that appear on the
label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish from
rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly
and frequently at least once a month with
lukewarm or cold water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each offroad trip. Pay special attention to the
removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign materials. Make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are kept
clear and clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar deposits
can damage your vehicle’s finish if not
removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain water
may not completely remove all these
deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on
painted surfaces, may be used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do
not allow soap to dry on the finish.
CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do
not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight or when the body of the
vehicle is warm.
• Be careful when washing the side
windows
of
your
vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through the
windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the plastic
parts, do not clean with chemical
solvents or strong detergents.
WARNING - Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
7 93
Maintenance
OJB037800
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine compartment including high pressure
water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits or engine
and related part located in the
engine compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/electronic components and
air duct inside the vehicle as this
may damage them.
7 94
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or
paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect
it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials
with a spot remover will usually strip the
wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax
these areas even if the rest of the vehicle
does not yet need waxing.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the body
with a dry cloth will scratch the
finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or
caustic agents on chrome-plated
or anodized aluminum parts. This
may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust
and may develop into a major repair
expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and requires
any metal repair or replacement, be sure
the body shop applies anti-corrosion
materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.
Maintenance
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects, use a
tar remover, not a scraper or other
sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-metal
parts from corrosion, apply a coating of
wax or chrome preservative and rub to
a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts with
a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with
non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other
protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials
are not removed, accelerated rusting can
occur on underbody parts such as the
fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust
system, even though they have been
treated with rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody
and wheel openings with lukewarm or
cold water once a month, after off-road
driving and at the end of each winter. Pay
special attention to these areas because
it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it. The
lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and
frame members have drain holes that
should not be allowed to clog with dirt;
trapped water in these areas can cause
rusting.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test the
brakes while driving slowly to see if
they have been affected by water. If
braking performance is impaired,
dry the brakes by applying them
lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
7 95
Maintenance
Aluminum or chrome wheel maintenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire
brushes on aluminum or chrome
wheels. They may scratch or damage
the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water.
Also, be sure to clean the wheels after
driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corrosion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid detergent. It may damage and corrode the
aluminum or chrome wheels coated
with a clear protective finish.
7 96
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion, we produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the
job. To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your vehicle can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is
also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
• Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts,
dust control chemicals, ocean air and
industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by
high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such
conditions, the corrosive material is kept
in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud
appears to be dry, it can still retain the
moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean
and free of mud or accumulations of
other materials. This applies not only to
the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
Maintenance
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of
the car is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to
clean the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other
areas that are hidden from view. Do a
thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it
away will accelerate corrosion rather
than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in
the garage or drive it into the garage
when it is still wet or covered with snow,
ice or mud. Even a heated garage can
contribute to corrosion unless it is well
ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always
remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure
the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if
you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
7 97
Maintenance
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and
air freshener from contacting the interior
parts because they may cause damage
or discoloration. If they do contact the
interior parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
CAUTION
Never allow water or other liquids
to come in contact with electrical/
electronic components inside the
vehicle as this may damage them.
CAUTION
When cleaning leather products
(steering wheel, seats etc.), use
neutral detergents or low alcohol
content solutions. If you use high
alcohol content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
7 98
Cleaning the upholstery and interior
trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets.
Remove fresh spots immediately with a
fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not
receive immediate attention, the fabric
can be stained and its color can be
affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties
can be reduced if the material is not
properly maintained.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fireresistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not
bleach or re-dye the webbing because
this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with
an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should
be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the
directions on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. This may result
in damage to the rear window
defroster grid.
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Service Passport
in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable
emission regulations.
There are three emission control systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of
the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car
inspected and maintained by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Program (ESP) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing,
turn the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) system off by pressing the ESP switch.
• After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESP system back on
by pressing the ESP switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution
caused by blow-by gases being emitted
from the crankcase. This system supplies
fresh filtered air to the crankcase through
the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,
which then pass through the PCV valve
into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission control
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
7 99
Maintenance
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the
canister are drawn into the surge tank
through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the
engine.
7 100
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is
a highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining
good vehicle performance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your vehicle could
affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety,
do not use unauthorized electronic
devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside
your vehicle, have it inspected and
repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all the
windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous
and could be lethal if inhaled.
Follow the instructions on this
page to avoid CO poisoning.
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in confined
or closed areas (such as garages) any
more than what is necessary to move
the vehicle in or out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short time
with the engine running, adjust the
ventilation system (as needed) to draw
outside air into the vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the
engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to start,
excessive attempts to restart the
engine may cause damage to the
emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalytic
converters (if equipped)
WARNING - Fire
• A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your vehicle. Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable
objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and catalytic
system are very hot while the
engine is running or immediately
after the engine is turned off. Keep
away from the exhaust system
and catalytic, you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat sink
around the exhaust system, do
not seal the bottom of the vehicle
or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a
fire risk under certain conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter emission control device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in section 1.
• Do not operate the vehicle when there
are signs of engine malfunction, such
as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.
Examples of misuse are coasting with
the ignition off and descending steep
grades in gear with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high idle
speed for extended periods (5 minutes
or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any part
of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with a extremly low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void your
warranties.
7 101
Maintenance
Diesel Particulate Filter (if equipped)
The Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) system removes the soot emitted from the
vehicle.
Unlike a disposable air filter, the DPF
system automatically burns (oxidizes)
and removes the accumulated soot
according to the driving condition. In
other words, the active burning by engine
control system and high exhaust gas
temperature caused by normal/high driving condition burns and removes the
accumulated soot.
However, if the vehicle continues to be
driven at low speed for long time, the
accumulated soot may not be automatically removed because of low exhaust
gas temperature. In this particular case,
the amount of soot is out of detection
limit, the soot oxidation process by
engine control system may not happen
and the malfunction indicator light may
blink.
When the malfunction indicator light
blinks, it may stop blinking by driving the
vehicle at more than 60km/h (37 mph) or
at more than second gear with 1500 ~
2000 engine rpm for a certain time (for
about 25 minutes).
7 102
If the malfunction indicator light continues to be blinked in spite of the procedure, please visit an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and then check the
DPF system.
If you continue to drive with the malfunction indicator light blinking for a long
time, the DPF system can be damaged
and fuel consumption can be worsen.
CAUTION - Diesel Fuel
(if equipped with DPF)
It is recommended to use the regulated automotive diesel fuel for
diesel vehicle equipped with the
DPF system.
If you use diesel fuel including high
sulfur (more than 50 ppm sulfur)
and unspecified additives, it can
cause the DPF system to be damaged and white smoke can be emitted.
Engine / 8-2
Dimensions / 8-2
Bulb wattage / 8-3
Tires and wheels / 8-4
Load and speed capacity tires / 8-4
Weight/Volume / 8-4
Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-5
Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-7
Vehicle certification label / 8-7
Tire specification and pressure label / 8-8
Engine number / 8-8
Air conditioner compressor label / 8-9
Declaration of conformity / 8-9
Specifications & Consumer information
8
Specifications & Consumer information
ENGINE
Item
Displacement
cc (cu. in)
Bore x Stroke
mm (in.)
Firing order
No. of cylinders
Gasoline Kappa 1.4L
Gasoline Gamma 1.4L
Gasoline Gamma 1.6L
Diesel 1.6L
1368 (83.48)
1396 (85.19)
1591 (97.09)
1582 (96.54)
72x84 (2.83x3.31)
77x74.99 (3.03x2.95) 77x85.44 (3.03x3.36) 77.2x84.5 (3.04x3.33)
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
4, In-line
4, In-line
4, In-line
4, In-line
DIMENSIONS
Item
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
8 2
175/70
195/50
175/70
195/50
R14
R16
R14
R16
4 Door
4370 (172)
1700 (66.9)
1457 (57.4)
1506 (59.3)
1488 (58.6)
1511 (59.5)
1493 (58.8)
2570 (101.2)
mm (in.)
5 Door
4115 (162)
1700 (66.9)
1457 (57.4)
1506 (59.3)
1488 (58.6)
1511 (59.5)
1493 (58.8)
2570 (101.2)
Specifications & Consumer information
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb
Headlights (Low/High)
Wattage
Bulb type
Type A
55/60
H4 L/L
Type B
60
H3B L/L
21
PY21W
Type A
5
W5W L/L
Type B
Front turn signal lights
Position lights
LED
LED
Side repeater lights*
5
WY5W
Front fog lights*
27
GE881
4 Door
21
PR21W
5 Door
21
P21W
21/5
P21/5W
Rear fog lights*
Stop and tail light*
Rear turn signal lights
4 Door
21
P21W
5 Door
21
PY21W
16
W16W
Back-up lights
4 Door
16
W16W
5 Door
5
W5W L/L
License plate lights
5
W5W L/L
Map lamps
8
FESTOON
Room lamp
8
FESTOON
Luggage lamp*
5
W5W
High mounted stop light*
* : If equipped
Type A : MFR (Multi Focus Reflector) Headlamp
Type B : Bi-Function Projection Headlamp
8 3
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRES AND WHEELS
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
175/70 R14
5.5Jx14
195/50 R16
6.0Jx16
Full size tire
Inflation pressure bar (psi, kPa)
Normal load
Maximum load
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
2.2
(32,220)
LOAD AND SPEED CAPACITY TIRES
Item
Tire size
Wheel size
Full size tire
175/70 R14
195/50 R16
5.5Jx14
6.0Jx16
Load Capacity
LI *1
kg
84
500
83
487
Speed Capacity
SS *2
km/h
T
190
H
210
*1 LI : LOAD INDEX
*2 SS : SPEED SYMBOL
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Item
Gross vehicle weight
Luggage volume
l (cu ft)
8 4
kg (lbs.)
4 Door
5 Door
Gasoline 1.4L
Gasoline 1.6L
Diesel 1.6L
1,560 (3,439)
1,560 (3,439)
1,650 (3,637)
465 (16.4)
370 (13.1)
465 (16.4)
370 (13.1)
465 (16.4)
370 (13.1)
2.2
(32,220)
Wheel lug nut torque
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
Specifications & Consumer information
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct
lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant
Engine oil *1 *2
(drain and refill)
Recommends
Kappa 1.4L
Gasoline Engine Gamma 1.4L
Gamma 1.6L
Volume
3.5 l (3.70 US qt.)
3.6 l (3.80 US qt.)
Diesel Engine
1.6L
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
Gasoline Engine
1.4L/1.6L
1.8~1.9 l
(1.9 ~ 2.01 US qt.)
Diesel Engine
1.6L
1.9~2.0 l
(2.01 ~ 2.11 US qt.)
Gasoline Engine
Diesel Engine
1.4L/1.6L
1.6L
6.8 l (7.19 US qt.)
6.6 l (6.97 US qt.)
Gasoline Engine
1.4L/1.6L
5.3 l (5.60 US qt.)
Diesel Engine
1.6L
6.3 l (6.66 US qt.)
Manual transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid
Coolant
Brake/Clutch fluid
Fuel
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
43 l (11 US gal.)
Classification
API Service SM *3,
ILSAC GF-4 or above
ACEA C2 or C3 (With DPF *4),
ACEA B4 (Without DPF *4)
HA SYN MTF (SK),
HD SYN MTF (H.K.SHELL),
GS PAO MTF (GS CALTEX),
API GL-4, SAE 75W/85
(HYUNDAI Genuine transaxle fluid)
DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP-III
MIXTURE, Antifreeze with water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum
radiator)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
-
*1: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing
the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s
time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3: If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
*4: Diesel Particulate Filter
8 5
Specifications & Consumer information
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could
be damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an
effect on fuel economy and cold weather
operating (engine start and engine oil
flowability). Lower viscosity engine oils
can provide better fuel economy and cold
weather performance, however, higher
viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.
Temperature
Using oils of any viscosity other than
those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil
viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100
50
120
20W-50
15W-40
Gasoline
Engine Oil *1
10W-30
5W-20*2, 5W-30
15W-40
10W-30
Diesel
Engine Oil
5W-30
0W-30
*1: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W20*2 (API SM/ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select
the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2: In Middle East, do not use the engine oil of viscosity grade SAE 5W-20.
8 6
Specifications & Consumer information
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
ORB080003
ORBC080001
ORBC080002
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc.
The number is punched on floor under
the passenger seat. To check the number
remove the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on the
plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
■ Type B
ORB083003
The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s (or front passenger’s) side
center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).
8 7
Specifications & Consumer information
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ORB070017
The tires supplied on your new vehicle
are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.
8 8
ENGINE NUMBER
■ Gasoline Engine (Kappa)
■ Gasoline Engine (Gamma)
■ Diesel Engine
ORB083006/ORBC080004/ORB080004
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
Specifications & Consumer information
AIR CONDITIONER
COMPRESSOR LABEL
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
■ Example
ODW081001
A compressor label informs you the type
of compressor your vehicle is equipped
with such as model, supplier part number, production number, refrigerant (1)
and refrigerant oil (2).
CE0678
The radio frequency components of the
vehicle comply with requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive
1995/5/EC.
Further information including the manufacturer's declaration of conformity is
available on HYUNDAI web site as follows;
http://service.hyundai-motor.com
8 9
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement